Home

Fujitsu V3.1.0 User's Manual

1. B3 ERGO uate Te Ua MAAS cscs cs cick mn ORIS ca ce ed eiTe e ai e d REL e ER E OS Bat Ezamples of CSV iun M cee Appondk C Tea Ma ea s eR 212 IEEE IE A eciete nae cease cescn de ace cst ezesccoaunegecetanes A E E A E E A 213 xiii Chapter 1 Login and Logout This chapter describes how to open and close the ROR console Preparations Before opening the ROR console be sure to read through the following instructions and restrictions When accessing the ROR console using Internet Explorer 8 or 9 be sure to enable the Compatibility View in Internet Explorer Select View Encoding in Internet Explorer and check if Auto Select is checked If Auto Select is not checked select it When downloading files using the ROR console it is necessary to disable Do not save encrypted pages to disk in the Advanced Settings of the browser The ROR console uses the Web browser s standard fonts and is designed to be viewed in a window of 1024 by 768 pixels or larger When using a monitor with a higher resolution than this it is recommended to enlarge the screen size If the Web browser is resized by a significant amount the display quality may deteriorate The ROR console uses JavaScript Active Script Cookies and IFRAMEs These must be enabled in the Web browser settings before using the ROR console Use SSL 3 0 and TLS 1 0 Specify either o
2. RSR SSES 158 Prd SUAS PAM E M H 164 C ML 0 M 164 A 5 Resource List Tab 167 Ad Resomee Doculs Tali nec Ree re eto e them eO o RIO RO o E gw 168 REE OLDER OR eed rero tem EP Nea oo baa sda vend n nt a RT En ER Tete dae eS E RO EUER 169 A02 Server AE inen re HERR ERE EGRE RENE AERE EU VENE E VERE EUR NNS 170 A 6 3 Physical OS VM Host and VM Guest Attributes iiec eterne nen einen eerta taedet eonun e Ra Ine pa eoe ek eoe ee paene 173 A 6 4 Network Device Attributes esee 2177 4 6 5 Power Monitoring Devices PDU pr UPS Attributes neret eret rne reet ener Lose tees br tiet E Er iei ene ese bb dI do 179 5 5 6 DR renin iit Sofware ARES aie erred rer rete timer ete rrt Pina ee Ee D Eee cer ne EA ee eee aids 180 AJ S CARN Br c 180 LY quc T T AE E C 181 T edu iid t 182 MUI UO i M 182 FW ER i PRONTI m uu 183 PU NANG e 185 Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files 1 pce oec terrere niire iauna eee Pre Vegan B 1 Obtaining the System Configuration File CSV Format eae B2 Pile Mah THNCT
3. 2 onere er iter ttt rei ea e teet tH n ues d ca e EES t IE Eesi 79 913 Canceling Monitoring Infeemation Sellups 2 2g dene iarrar ceci re ieri eerte P EH epe n 80 9S CTs Ua Ee i C 80 9 8 1 Changing Storage Management Software Basic Iufoemafion iie tier testi tete ten rbi ete ehe ertet dente tede doen 80 9 5 2C hansins storape Unit Basie MIMO oe oss rara ce tcr Ie err tree rta te ren ir deae to i cbe i te ie eb leet egg 80 25 3 Changing Virtual Storage Resource Basic DIOVIBAGO 15 cr retenue one triente ettet tna ba essere SEA een EAE FERE REESE 81 O64 Changing Disk Resource Basic UnFODWIEIR ON eto hecha aderit rre o dei i RT reb e eee Tet re detti ce TRE ais 81 Chapter 10 Configuring the Operating Environments of Managed Servers sssssseseeeeeeeneen nennen 83 10 1 Configuring WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration eec eee eeieeth teen teeth teneant 83 102 DeMoyine Cloning Minge MN 85 Chapter Ti IE URRE En MS UB AR A A ET E E EEA 11 2 Deleting Managed Servess icc eneeonmanimeneereii med dero ENE tenerte p D OO PH DDR EHE RE Jupe Carat Tae VION MT i PH 11 4 Deletuis LAN SWwItGhes oss cscs ees tec petite tenere ee tite irte ht erase dicitis tret Herde ieu esr vet iie Br Ene eol oa T AND JE eh MIU EUER EE 11 4 2 Deleting LAN Swit
4. Note When operating in IBP mode A Information PA If a problem occurs on a resource a status icon indicating the problem is shown on top of the resource s own icon For details on status icons refer to 13 4 1 Resource Statuses 0606062060600909209009000090909090900009090909909909000009090909909209000000909090990909000090909099090000009090909090000000990909909000000090090000090999 13 4 3 Other Icons The following tables detail the icons displayed in the Network Map Table 13 10 Admin Server Icon e Ste Wem Indicates the server used as the admin server Table 13 11 Map Navigation Icons m e 105 w je m ee 13 5 Network Links This section details the network links displayed in the Network Map 13 5 1 Link Display The following table details the physical and virtual links displayed between resources Table 13 12 Links Reread oval L meeeesmummk 0 Se L mmeeesepe O 13 5 2 Link Statuses Link statuses are shown by adding colored outlines to displayed links as described in 13 5 1 Link Display The following table shows display examples of abnormal link statuses Table 13 13 Statuses of Physical or Virtual Links Represents a link with an error status e g its opposite port or NIC is disabled or the cable between this link and its opposite port or NIC is disconnected Represents a link with a warning status For example an aggregated link
5. Restart the Related Service described in 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE 94 12 3 Exporting the System Configuration File This section explains the method for exporting a system configuration file containing the current system settings Use the following procedure to export the system configuration file in CSV format from the ROR console 1 Open and log in to the ROR console according to Chapter 1 Login and Logout 2 In the ROR console select File System Configuration File Export from the menu 3 The export process starts automatically 4 When the process complete successfully the File Download dialog is displayed Click one of the following When clicking Save As the Save As dialog is displayed specify the destination folder and file name and then save the file Note that the system configuration file can be exported only in the CSV format When clicking Open Open the file using an application such as Excel associated to CSV files When clicking Cancel Export operations will be cancelled G amp Note If any server is in switchover state the server name is enclosed in parentheses such as name The admin server subnet information is not output in the Subnet section Ce ey Point Error handling If an error occurs during the export an error message is displayed Follow the message diagnostic to resolve the problem 95 Chapter 13 Net
6. and hyphens 194 amp Note LAN switch blade names should be unique between all LAN switch blades The names are case sensitive 00600600009090929090900909000000090029090909090909000000900909090990990900000000090090999099090909290000000900999090909000000009099999 ip address Enter the same IP address as that set on the LAN switch blade Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources CO snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read only permission as that set on the LAN switch blade Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens user_name Enter the name of the user account used to remotely log into the LAN switch blade Enter up to 64 characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores _ or hyphens passwd Enter the password of the above user account for remote login Enter a string of up to 80 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes 0x20 0x21 or 0x23 to Ox7e and no double quotations Passwords entered in this field are seen as plain text passwords passwd_enc Enter one of the following If passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted privileged_passwd Enter the admin password of the above user account Enter a string of up to 80 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASC
7. 132 Note When this process is cancelled cloning image deployment to all destination servers is cancelled Please note that canceling the deployment of a cloning image does not restore the destination server to the state before the deployment took place 3 Restart applications on the destination server s Perform the following settings if necessary The settings of NIC redundancy for admin LANs and public LANs The settings of tagged VLANs for NICs After deployment destination servers are set to use the admin server as their default gateway Re configure such network settings if necessary Check that applications are running properly on destination servers At this point if an application is still using the source server s hostname or IP address e g within application specific settings or configuration file manually update such settings with the destination server values G amp Note When a managed server is a PRIMEQUEST set the PSA MMB IP address after deployment For details refer to the PRIMERGY Partition Model manual 06060600000002099090909909090000000909090909900900000000090090909909090900000000090090909909909000000000090990920900909000000090090999 4 Release maintenance mode This step is not required if the Release from Maintenance Mode after deployment checkbox was enabled in the Deploy a Cloning Image dialog a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the source server or its phy
8. 4 Available only for PRIMERGY BX servers 5 Cannot be set for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 6 Cannot be selected for PRIMEQUEST 7 Can only be selected for SPARC Enterprise servers 8 Only the admin LAN subnet information can be displayed with general user privileges 9 Not available for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 10 Cannot be selected for a VM host 1 General users cannot change environmental data settings A 2 2 Popup Menus Right clicking an object displayed in the resource tree or in the Image List tab displays a popup menu with a list of options available for that object The tables below detail the popup menus provided for each object Available menus vary according to user account privileges Table A 2 Popup Menus Available for the Server Resources Tree Node Popup Menu Function Bund SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Registers a SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series server egister C E Registers the chassis of a SPARC Enterprise M4000 PARC Ent Partition Model SPARC Enterprise Partition Model 45000 M8000 M9000 server PRIMEQUEST Registers the chassis of a PRIMEQUEST Environmental Data Chassis Exports environmental data collected from chassis Export Environmental Data Servers Exports environmental data collected from servers Table A 3 Pooup Menus Available for Chassis Popup Menu Function e 0 A Modify Registration Setti
9. 8 2 Changing Port Numbers This section explains how to change the ports used by the Manager services and related services of Resource Orchestrator Resource Orchestrator requires the following services to be running When starting these services ensure that the ports they are using do not conflict with the ports used by other applications or services If necessary change the ports used by Resource Orchestrator services Windows Manager Manager Services Resource Coordinator Manager Resource Coordinator Task Manager Resource Coordinator Web Server Apache Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel2 Resource Coordinator DB Server PostgreSQL 59 Related Services Deployment Service TFTP Service PXE Services DHCP Server Linux Manager Manager Services rcxmanager rcxtaskmgr rexmongrell rcxmongrel2 rcxhttpd rcxdb Related Services scwdepsvd scwpxesvd scwtftpd dhepd Note Necessary when managing a managed server in a separate subnet to the admin server Change the ports used by the above services if there is a possibility that they will conflict with other applications or services For Windows operating systems an ephemeral port may conflict with a Resource Orchestrator service if the range allowed for ephemeral ports is changed In this case change the port number to a value not included in the range for ephemeral port
10. For details refer to 7 4 3 HBA address rename Settings 7 4 When using Rack Mount and Tower Servers This section explains how to register resources when using rack mount or tower servers When using rack mount or tower servers use the following procedure to register resources Register Rack Mount or Tower Servers Register LAN Switches 7 4 1 Registering Rack Mount or Tower Servers This section explains how to register a rack mount or tower server 34 Figure 7 2 Status Transition Diagram for Managed Servers Registering Managed Server Deleting Managed Server Not displayed Registering Agent pm Registering Managed Server dhol Automatic Agent registration With a registered agent Deleting Managed Server C Server status L gt Functions that can be used with that server status E The target resource is not displayed in the resource tree Use the following procedure to register rack mount or tower servers 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register Server from the popup menu The Register Server dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Enter items differ depending on whether the Register agent checkbox is selected as described below If this checkbox is checked agents will be registered after server registration If this checkbox is not checked registration of agents will not
11. System Configuration Template CSV format The CSV file will be opened from the associated application such as Excel Check the file content and save it Figure B 1 Selection Window F ServerView Resource Orchestrator V3 0 0 ME x S ServerView ServerView Resource Orchestrator Aw En System Configuration Template CSV format Installation amp Environment setup conditions check tool Setup Documentation Tool This menu presents the functionality provided by Resource Orchestrator s preconfiguration feature When using the System Configuration Template Excel format for Preconfiguration feature Microsoft R Excel 2002 or later is required Copyright 2007 2011 FUJITSU LIMITED m Information If the above window does not open execute RcSetup exe from the DVD ROM drive From the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM Set the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM in the DVD ROM drive and copy the following file Windows DVD ROM_drive template ja template csv Linux DVD ROM mount pointhemplate ja template csv 186 From the ROR console The System Configuration Template can be obtained from a Resource Orchestrator manager installation 1 Open and log in to the ROR console according to Chapter 1 Login and Logout 2 Select File System Configuration File Download Template from the ROR console menu Displays the File Download window 3 Click Save 4 Specify the destination directory and the fil
12. When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server management software ServerView is selected Windows Manager gt Installation_tolde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename and the following model or OS PRIMERGY BX960 S1 XenServer6 or later Windows Manager gt Installation_tolde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Backing up a System Image Use the following procedure to back up a system image from a managed server 1 Place the target server into maintenance mode and stop all of its applications a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu The Set Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed As the target server is restarted during backup all of its applications should be stopped beforehand When backing up a VM host all of its VM guests should also be stopped b Click OK The target server is placed into maintenance mode 2 Back up a system image from the tar
13. amp Note As Windows bridge connections are not supported network links will not be displayed The following actions are available in the Network Map Switching between map types 96 Screen scrolling Scroll button Map drag and drop Navigation map drag and drop Maximizing and minimizing of the display area Configuring automatic update to show the latest status Updating to show the latest status Hiding of the navigation map Hiding of display filter options Showing or hiding of the following information Resource descriptions Network links VLANs Resetting to initial display Highlighting of a selected resource Showing or hiding of details for the following resources Servers including VM hosts LAN switches VM guests Virtual switches 13 2 Preparations The following preparations are required to add display content to the Network Map 1 Register LAN switches LAN switch blades included in a chassis or external switches For details on the registration method refer to 7 4 2 Registering LAN Switches The following LAN switches are supported by the Network Map BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 Cisco Catalyst 2950 series Cisco Catalyst 2960 series Cisco Catalyst 3560 series Cisco Catalyst 3750 series 2 Detect physical network links a From the
14. 1 Select Operation VM Home Position Clear from the ROR console menu The Clear VM Home Position Settings dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The VM Home Position settings are cleared Clearing a VM Host s VM Home Position Clear VM Home Position of selected VM hosts using the following procedure 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click a VM host and select VM Home Position Clear from the popup menu The Clear VM Home Position Setting dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The VM Home Position setting is cleared 113 15 4 External Software This section explains how to configure the settings required by Resource Orchestrator to interact with third party software VM management console To launch an external VM management console provided by the virtualization software used from the ROR console users must be granted the permission to launch this management console in the Java Plug in policy settings For details on the VM management consoles that can be started from the ROR console refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE Use the following procedure to enable launch of the VM management console 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target VM host or VM guest and select VM Management Console from the menu that is displayed The Launch VM Management Console dialog is displayed 2 Click OK If launch of the VM management console from
15. 291209 02 190557 Completes Tree Panel Recent Operations Menus Operations can be performed either from the menu bar or popup menus Status Panel The Status Panel displays the status of managed servers If a warning or error event occurs on a managed server the status monitoring area starts to blink Tree Panel By switching between tree types it is possible to select from the following 5 types of trees Server Resources The resources below are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon Chassis Server 153 Physical OS VM Host VM Guest LAN Switch LAN Switch Blades Network Devices The resources below are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon Network Devices Firewalls Network Devices Server Load Balancers Network Devices L2 Switches Network Resources The resources below are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon LAN switch excluding LAN switch blades Power Monitoring Devices The following power monitoring devices are shown in a tree view PDU Power Distribution Unit UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Management Software The following management software which can be used in coordination with Resource Orchestrator are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon Management Software vCenter Server Management Software SCVMM Managemen
16. 65 Chapter 9 Changing Resources This chapter explains how to change settings for the admin server or resources registered on the admin server 9 1 Changing Chassis and Managed Server Settings This section explains how to change the settings for the chassis and managed servers If collecting the system images and cloning images of managed servers collect them after completing changes to managed server settings For details on backing up system images refer to 16 2 Backup For details on how to collect cloning images refer to 17 2 Collecting amp Note To change VM guest settings use the management console of the server virtualization software used A managed server that has already been registered cannot be moved to a different slot To move a managed server to a different slot first delete the managed server then move it to the new slot and register it again 0060600000920090000000920909200000000990909000020290020000600092999 e0060600600000000000092060600000002299 ees0 cc0 0206cc90229 9 DE 9 1 1 Changing Chassis Names This section explains how to change chassis names Use the following procedure to change the name of a registered chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Chassis name Enter a character
17. A LAN switch that is mounted in the chassis of a blade server 216 license The rights to use specific functions Users can use specific functions by purchasing a license for the function and registering it on the manager link aggregation Function used to multiplex multiple ports and use them as a single virtual port With this function if one of the multiplexed ports fails its load can be divided among the other ports and the overall redundancy of ports improved logical volume A logical disk that has been divided into multiple partitions LSB Logical System Board A system board that is allocated a logical number LSB number so that it can be recognized from the domain during domain configuration maintenance mode The state where operations on managed servers are stopped in order to perform maintenance work In this state the backup and restoration of system images and the collection and deployment of cloning images can be performed However when using Auto Recovery it is necessary to change from this mode to active mode When in maintenance mode it is not possible to switch over to a spare server if a server fails managed server A collective term referring to a server that is managed as a component of a system management blade A server management unit that has a dedicated CPU and LAN interface and manages blade servers Used for gathering server blade data failure notification power control etc M
18. Destination Select a destination VM host Migration Method Select the desired migration type 3 Click OK The selected VM guest is migrated to its new host VM guests can be migrated from the command line using the rexadm server migrate command For details refer to 3 2 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command VE 111 15 2 VM Maintenance Mode of VM Hosts This section explains how to set and release VM maintenance mode on VM hosts For details on VM maintenance mode refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE VM maintenance mode can also be set or released from the command line using the rexadm server set command For details refer to 3 2 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command VE 15 3 VM Home Position This section explains VM Home Position By configuring the VM Home Position in advance it is possible to restore VM guests to their original VM host using only one operation when they have been migrated to a different VM host for operation or maintenance needs This enables restoration of multiple VM guests to their original locations without the need to record their original locations 15 3 1 Setting VM Home Position When configuring a VM Home Position the relationships of operating VM guests and registered VM hosts are retained Setting is only available when more than one VM guest exists A Information When registering a new VM host as the relationshi
19. The method used for VM guest migration is automatically selected from cold migration and live migration after each VM guest s power status is checked Migrating all VM Guests to their VM Home Positions Use the following procedure to migrate the VM guests of a system to their VM Home Position 1 Select Operation VM Home Position Back to Home from the ROR console menu The Migrate VM Guests to their VM Home Positions dialog is displayed 2 Click OK Migration of VM guests to their VM Home Positions will be performed Migrating VM Guests of a Selected VM Host to their VM Home Position Use the following procedure to migrate VM guests associated with a selected VM host to their VM Home Position 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click a VM host and select VM Home Position Back to Home from the popup menu The Migrate VM Guests to their VM Home Position dialog is displayed 2 Click OK Migration of VM guests to their VM Home Position will be performed When migrating VM guests to their VM Home Position use the rcxadm server migrate command For details on the rexadm server command refer to 3 2 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command VE 15 3 3 Clearing VM Home Position When the VM Home Position is cleared the relationships of VM hosts and VM guests are cleared Clearing a System s VM Home Position Use the following procedure to clear the VM Home Position of all VM host s on a system
20. VLAN Resources for which VLAN IDs have been applied are displayed in a tree view The following resource types are displayed Server Switch For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE Sorting the Resources in the Tree The tree displays the resources in ascending order of name by resource type To sort the resource list within the same type of resource use the following method 166 Storage Location of the Definition File Windows Manager Installation foldeNSVRORMManagerVetcWcustomize data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name gui config rcxprop Definition File Format RESOURCE TREE SORT ORDER ARESOURCE TREE ORDER Items in the Definition File RESOURCE TREE ORDER Specify either one of the following options name Displays the resource list in ascending alphabetical order of resource names registered Displays the resource list in the order in which the resources were registered or created Note 0 06090000000900909909909909090000000009090909099090900000000090909009000090000000900900909090909000000000009090900000000000009999 Toenable the above mentioned setting restart the manager after editing the definition file The orders of some lists such as for blade servers in the server tree cannot be changed 090606000000009290929099090909090000000909990909909090000000909099009902929090900090
21. With Agent Registration Agents are automatically registered after server registration is completed Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address used by this server on the admin LAN When IP address is displayed Entering an admin LAN IP address is not required Agents are automatically registered amp Note 0900600000000000000000090909009090909090909900990902909099099000090000090909090090000000000090900000990999929909929099099099990900920299 9 If ServerView Agents mandatory software is not running message number 67231 will be displayed In this case server registration succeeds but the agent is not registered For details on the appropriate corrective action refer to Message number 67231 in Messages If the admin LAN IP address of servers not running a physical OS or a VM host are displayed old information may have been being displayed After cancelling registration of the server right click the chassis on the server resource tree and select Update from the popup menu to request an update of hardware properties The IP address is updated to the correct value it takes several seconds to obtain the information and to update When IP address is not displayed Enter the IP address of this server s admin LAN network interface The Agent will not be registered automatically but can be manually registered after server registration if necessary After registering servers register agents as required A Information
22. Enter a comment that identifies the cloning image Up to 128 characters other than percent signs 96 back slashes double quotes and line feed characters can be specified If Update was selected for the Cloning Image Name option the comment of the most recent image version is displayed If no comment is specified a hyphen will be displayed in the ROR console It is recommended to enter comments with information such as hardware configuration server model disk size and number of network interfaces software configuration names of installed software and applied patches and the status of network parameter auto configuration function Release Maintenance Mode after collection checkbox Enable this option to automatically release the source server from maintenance mode after image collection and maintenance work If this option disabled maintenance mode should be released manually after collecting the cloning image c Click OK The process of collecting the cloning image starts The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process 4 Restart applications on the source server Restore the settings of any service whose startup settings were changed in step 2 and start these services Restore the settings for the following cases NIC redundancy for admin LANs and public LANs
23. IPv4 Patrol Status Mode CL Device R R 4R Active eth0 ON eth1 OFF Active p sha0 ON Active eth2 ON eth3 OFF Device 140 Items to confirm The status of the virtual interface must be Active When the standby patrol function is used p mode the status of the virtual interface set in standby patrol sha2 in the output example above must be Active Using the opt FJS Vhanet usr sbin dsppoll Command opt FJSVhanet usr sbin dsppoll RETURN Polling Status ON interval idle times 5 repair time 5 link detection NO FAILOVER Status YES Status Name Mode Primary Target Secondary Target HUB HUB p R pem 192 168 1 101 0N 192 168 1 102 WAIT ACTIVE 192 168 1 101 0N 192 168 1 102 WAIT ACTIVE Items to confirm The monitoring status Polling Status must be ON monitoring in progress If one monitoring destination is specified the status of that destination Primary Target must be ON monitoring in progress If two monitoring destinations are specified the status of the primary destination Primary Target must be ON monitoring in progress and the status of the secondary destination Secondary Target must be WAIT on standby When HUB HUB monitoring is set to ON the status HUB HUB must be ACTIVE monitoring in progress If the interfa
24. Make changes to the values as needed 3 Click OK The settings for the monitoring information are changed to the entered settings 9 7 2 Canceling Monitoring Information Settings This section explains how to cancel monitoring information settings Use the following procedure to cancel the monitoring information settings 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target physical OS and the VM hosts and select Modify Monitoring Settings from the popup menu The Configuring monitoring settings dialog is displayed 2 Uncheck the Enable ping monitoring checkbox 3 Click OK The settings for the monitoring information are cancelled 9 8 Changing Storage This section explains how to change storage settings 9 8 1 Changing Storage Management Software Basic Information This section explains how to change the basic settings of storage management software The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to change the basic settings of storage management software 1 In the ROR console storage tree right click the target storage management software and select Modify Registration Settings from the displayed menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click OK Basic informat
25. Power ON status and selecting lt Options gt gt gt in the displayed Power Operation dialog enables selection of the Force Shutdown and Force Reboot actions A forced shutdown or reboot will forcibly power off or reboot the managed server blade without waiting for its OS to shut down cleanly 9 Figure 6 6 Power Operation Dialog with Additional Options Power Operation abc Please select one of the following power operations for the server Shutdown G9 Reboot Force Shutdown Selecting Force Shutdown will forcibly power off the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog will power off the managed server without waiting for its OS to shut down cleanly At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power OFF in progress state orange blinking The power button finally displays Power OFF status after confirming that the target server has been shut down correctly Force Reboot Selecting Force Reboot will forcibly reboot the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking OK in the confirmation dialog will power off and reboot the managed server without waiting for its OS to shut down cleanly At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power ON in progress state green blinking The power button finally displays Power ON status after confirming that the OS has started
26. Shows whether network settings will be automatically adjusted during server switchover Force spare server to power off during switchover The setting whether the spare server is turned off forcibly when switching over to the spare server is displayed Switch over to spare server running VM guests The setting whether the server is switched to a VM host on which a VM guest exists is displayed Spare server Displays the name of the physical server that will replace the current active server when server switchover occurs HBA Address Rename Settings Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests or SPARC Enterprise servers WWNN The WWNN set on the HBA is displayed WWPN 1 The first WWPN set on the HBA is displayed The WWPN should be set to the I O address of each HBA in descending order Therefore for rack mount or tower servers the order may not correspond with port number order described for the HBA 175 WWPN 2 The second WWPN set on the HBA is displayed The WWPN should be set to the I O address of each HBA in descending order Therefore for rack mount or tower servers the order may not correspond with port number order described for the HBA Network Properties Area VLAN The following information is not displayed for VM guests Index The mounted position index of each network interface on the server is displayed Port VLAN The port VLAN IDs set on the LAN switch ports connected to each network interface
27. The Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 2 Select the subnet to delete 3 Click Delete The Delete Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 4 Click OK The target subnet information is deleted A Information When an admin LAN subnet is deleted the simplified DHCP service for Resource Orchestrator will be disabled In this case either use the OS standard DHCP service that was enabled when the admin LAN subnet was registered or perform re installation after uninstalling the manager Gj Note 060606000090920909000000909090000009099009000009090909090909000006090909090000009090090900000009090900909000000990909090000009090900000090299 It is not possible to delete the information of subnets which have managed servers registered Before deleting subnet information delete all managed servers that have been registered on the relevant subnet 06606060200006009090060060909000290909000090920090090009009209990900009090090990909009000900909090090000909209090090000090909929090006000200900600606906299 11 8 Unregistering ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser This section explains how to unregister ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser can be unregistered using the rcxadm storagemgr unregister command For details on the rexadm storagemgr unregister command refer to 5 13 rcxadm storagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE 89 Chapter 12 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification This
28. The target server is released from maintenance mode G amp Note The number of system image versions that can be kept for a managed server is limited If a new system image backup is collected when this limit has already been reached the oldest version will be deleted By default the maximum number of system images is 3 This setting can be changed by following the instructions given in 8 3 Changing the Maximum Number of System Image Versions When backing up a new system image its version number will be increased by one The version number of the first backed up system image of a managed server will always be 1 When backing up a VM host in a high availability configuration all VM guests stored on shared disks should be migrated to another VM host beforehand During backup because the target VM host will be automatically set to VM maintenance mode the VM host should be in a state that allows VM maintenance mode to be set After backing up the VM host migrate the VM guests back to their original VM host Refer to the server virtualization software manual and D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE for information on how to migrate VM guests or about the VM maintenance mode When using PRIMECLUSTER GLS for admin LAN redundancy backup of a system image may fail if the following message is displayed in the event log FJSVrcx WARNING 41306 server NIC takeover on Admin LAN was detected If this oc
29. and delete user accounts Chapter 6 BladeViewer Provides an overview of BladeViewer and explains its features Chapter 7 Registering Resources Explains how to register the resources used by Resource Orchestrator Chapter 8 Changing Admin Server Settings Explains how to change the settings of the admin server Chapter 9 Changing Resources Explains how to change settings for the admin server or resources registered on the admin server Chapter 10 Configuring the Operating Environments of Managed Servers Explains how to install software to the registered managed servers and set up their operating environment Chapter 11 Deleting Resources Explains how to delete resources Chapter 12 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification Provides an overview of the pre configuration function and explains how to use system configuration files Chapter 13 Network Map Provides an overview of the Network Map and explains its features Chapter 14 Power Control Explains how to remotely control the power state of managed resources Chapter 15 Control of VM Environments Explains the features specific to VM guests and VM hosts Chapter 16 Backup and Restore Explains how to use the backup and restore functions provided in Resource Orchestrator Chapter 17 Cloning Physical Servers Explains how to use the server cloning function Chapter 18 Server Switchover Settings Explains the settings and usage of the server switchover function Chapter 19 Col
30. for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for x86 Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for Intel64 Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Virtual Machine Function RHEL KVM Vi Citrix XenServer TM 5 5 Citrix Essentials TM for XenServer 5 5 Enterprise Edition Citrix XenServer TM 6 0 Citrix Essentials TM for XenServer 6 0 Enterprise Edition Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise
31. in the Design Guide VE for details on Single Sign On URL https Admin server IP address 23461 On a Windows admin server the ROR console can also be opened by selecting start All Programs Resource Orchestrator ROR console amp Note If the login screen is not displayed confirm the following URL entered in address bar of the Web browser The proxy settings of the Web browser are correct The firewall settings on the admin server are correct If already logged in from another Web browser window login may be performed automatically without displaying the login screen Login In the login screen enter the following items and click Login The ROR console or BladeViewer is displayed after a successful login User ID Password However opening multiple Web browsers from an already opened browser window e g using the File New Window menu from a Web browser may disable logging in as a different user To log in as a different user start up a new Web browser from the Windows start menu A Information 0000600002290990900000099209900000090990090000009090999000000909099909000009090000000000090990900000909099000000909909909090000099299 During installation enter the following user account name and password When Single Sign On is configured The name of the user account and password used for ServerView Operations Manager When Single Sign On is not configured The user name and password of t
32. 32 Bit Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 5 for x86_64 64 Bit Solaris TM 10 Operating System SCVMM System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager VMware R Infrastructure 3 VMware vSphere R 4 VMware sns 4 1 VMware vSphere R 5 V V V Oracle Enterprise Linux Mware R ESXi TM VMware R Infrastructure 3 VMware R Infrastructure Client VMware vSphere R 4 0 vii BMC BladeLogic Server Automation ServerView SNMP Agents for MS Windows 32bit 64bit ServerView Agent ServerView Agents Linux ServerView Agents VMware for VMware ESX Server Microsoft R Office Excel R 2010 Excel Microsoft R Office Excel R 2007 Microsoft R Office Excel R 2003 Excel 2007 Microsoft R Office Excel R 2007 Excel 2010 Microsoft R Office Excel R 2010 RCVE ServerView Resource Coordinator VE Excel 2003 Microsoft R Office Excel R 2003 ServerView Resource Orchestrator ROR VE ServerView Resource Orchestrator Virtual Edition ROR CE ServerView Resource Orchestrator Cloud Edition Systemwalker Resource Coordinator Resource Coordinator VE ServerView Resource Coordinator VE Systemwalker Resource Coordinator Virtual server Edition Resource Orchestrator ServerView Resource Orchestrator Export Administration Regulation Declaration Documents produced by FUJITSU may contain technology controlled under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan D
33. BX900 11 t B BX900 12 t EJ BX900 13 In the tree panel clicking the area on the upper left enables selection and display of the following 5 types of tree server resources network devices power monitoring devices management software and VLAN Server Resources Chassis servers physical OSs VM hosts VM guests and LAN switches managed in Resource Orchestrator are displayed in a tree view Resources are primarily displayed in registration order However for blade servers within a common chassis the order by which Resource Orchestrator detects server blades takes precedence Resources displayed in the resource tree are represented by an icon and their resource name For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE For a non registered resource one of the following registration states is displayed at the end of the resource s name Table A 17 Resource Registration States Unregistered The resource was automatically detected but has not been registered yet Registering The resource is being registered Admin Server This server is the admin server itself If a label was set for a resource in BladeViewer that label is displayed after the resource name Display Format resource name label Clicking a resource in the resource tree displays information related to that resource in the Main Panel Right clicking a resource displays a list
34. HBA address rename and VIOM cannot be used together within the same chassis I O virtualization settings for all the servers mounted in one chassis must be made using either HBA address rename or VIOM 2 These settings can be omitted for resources that have already been installed or registered 10 1 Configuring WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration This section explains how to configure WWN settings for integration with ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Specifying HBA WWNs storage WWNs and AffinityGroup for ETERNUS SE Storage Cruiser enables configuration of the zoning settings of Fibre Channel switches and storage unit host affinity When performing switchover on managed servers using the WWN settings enables the admin server to automatically change settings of storage devices Use of this function requires registration of specific settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser in advance Fibre Channel Switches and storage units connected to managed servers must be registered on ESC amp Note WWN settings for servers and HBAs are not performed by this function Configuration cannot be performed for managed servers which are configured as spare servers or are used as spare servers 000606000909990000090999090900900090990990909000090909090990909090000909909909909000009990909000009099099099099099000099990990900000999090900909999 Use the following procedure to configure the WWN settings When changing the current WWN informat
35. IP address ILOM XSCF To modify user account settings select the Modify remote management controller login account checkbox and change the User ID and Password fields under Remote management controller ILOM XSCF For SPARC Enterprise T servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller settings LOM 1 Change settings on the remote management controller ILOM If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority Admin privileges 2 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change the Remote Management Controller IP address ILOM XSCF To modify user account settings select the Modify remote management controller login account checkbox and change the User ID and Password fields under Remote management controller ILOM XSCF For PRIMEQUEST servers Use the following procedure to change remote server management settings 1 Change the remote server management settings If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority 69 2 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 3 Select the Modify remote server management login account checkbo
36. LAN IP address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Device type The device type PDU or UPS is displayed Model The model name of the PDU or UPS is displayed Comments Comments entered when registering a PDU or UPS are displayed 179 Hardware Details Area Serial number The serial number of the PDU or UPS is displayed Voltage The voltage supplied to the PDU or UPS is displayed Hardware version The hardware version of the PDU is displayed This is not displayed for UPSs Firmware version The firmware version of the device PDU or UPS is displayed Date of manufacture The date of manufacture of the PDU or UPS is displayed Outlets The number of outlets provided by the PDU is displayed This is not displayed for UPSs Intended orientation The intended orientation horizontal or vertical of the PDU is displayed This is not displayed for UPSs A 6 6 Management Software Attributes General Area Management software name The name used to identify the management software is displayed Type The type of the management software is displayed One of the following is displayed vCenter Server SCVMM VIOM IP address The IP address used to connect to the management software is displayed Status The status of the management software is displayed Management software A link to the web interface of the management software is displayed A 7 Recovery Settings Tab The Recovery Settings tab displays
37. Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function ee Citrix XenServer TM 6 0 Citrix Essentials TM for XenServer 6 0 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R MS DOS R operating system DR DOS R SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack2 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack2 for EM64T SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack3 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack3 for EM64T SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for EM64T SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 Service Pack1 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 Service Pack1 for EM64T SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 4 for x86 32 Bit Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 4 for x86_64 64 Bit Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 5 for x86
38. Note Integration with VIOM cannot be cancelled in the following cases When there are spare server settings involving the VIOM server profile exchange method When there are servers using the VIOM server profile exchange method that are in the following states Being switched over Have been switched over prior to failback Being failed back 87 Server blades that are managed using VIOM and are currently the target of operations by Resource Orchestrator power control image related processes etc 11 4 Deleting LAN Switches This section explains how to delete LAN switches There are two methods for LAN switch deletion based on the LAN switch registration method used Deleting LAN Switch Blades Deleting LAN Switches 11 4 1 Deleting LAN Switch Blades This section explains how to delete LAN switch blades Use the following procedure to delete LAN switch blades 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target LAN switch blade is unregistered 11 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches This section explains how to delete LAN switches Use the following procedure to delete LAN switches 1 In the ROR console network resource tree right click the target LAN switch and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target L
39. P addresses belonging to registered admin LAN subnets cannot be changed When a managed server belongs to the same subnet as the admin server either delete the managed server or manually change the admin IP address of the managed server Without changing the IP address of the managed server it is not possible to register the information of the subnet the managed server belongs to or change the information of the subnet Changing the IP Address of a Clustered Manager In a clustered manager configuration use the following procedure to change the IP address set within the operating system Windows Manager Change the IP address using the Failover Cluster Management window Linux Manager 1 Stop the manager s cluster service Stop the manager s cluster service from the cluster administration view Cluster Admin 56 2 Log in to the admin server s primary node Log in to the operating system of the admin server s primary node with administration privileges 3 Mount the shared disk on the primary node Mount the admin server s shared disk on the primary node 4 Change takeover the logical IP address Release PRIMECLUSTER GLS virtual interface settings from the PRIMECLUSTER resource then change the PRIMECLUSTER GLS configuration For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual 5 Activate the takeover logical IP address Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line to activate the takeover logical IP a
40. PRIMERGY BX servers 4 Can only be selected for VM guests 5 When opening the L Server console screen at the second time or later a window for iRMC management may be opened instead of the console screen If an iRMC management screen is displayed close that screen and then start the console screen again 6 Available only for PRIMERGY series PRIMEQUEST and SPARC Enterprise M series servers 7 This option is only available for chassis equipped with power monitoring capabilities Table A 5 Popup Menus Available for SPARC Enterprise Servers Popup Menu Function Register 159 Popup Menu Function Modifies a SPARC Enterprise server s registration Registration Settings settings Modify WWN Settings Modifies the WWN settings for a server Spare Server Settings Modifies a server s recovery settings Places a server into maintenance mode Maintenance Mode Release Sets a server to active mode Powers on a SPARC Enterprise server OFF Powers off a SPARC Enterprise server after shutting down its operating system OFF Forced Bowes off a DERRE Enterprise server without shutting down its operating system Reposts a SPARC Enterprise server after shutting down its operating system Reboot Forced KEBO a REA Enterprise server without shutting down its operating system External Management Opens external server management software for SPARC Software Enterprise servers Export 2 Environmental Data Exports e
41. Platform tab multiple entries might be displayed in the Recent Operations for that single operation When multiple entries are displayed match the resource name displayed in the tab on which the operation has been executed to the resource name in the Operation column to locate the operation in concern When the link in the Operation column is clicked the Progress Details dialog is displayed The Progress Details dialog displays the following information Progress List The list of the executed processes and the status are displayed for the selected operation If an operation is performed simultaneously for multiple resources the processes are displayed in a tree view for each target resource Message List The list of any error messages that occurred during the operation is displayed Detailed information is displayed under the list when each message is selected For the operation that can be cancelled The Cancel link is displayed to the right of the Status column Clicking this link displays a confirmation dialog for cancelling the operation A 11 Event This section describes the event area of the ROR console Figure A 7 Event RETOR RC METTRE ERIS AU CM et Laos Event Log Oer v warming info Filter K 4 N75 gt gt info 2012 05 02 18 10 30 B8X6900 7 21105 FJSVrex INFO 21105 8X9000 7 server Ratus is changed to normal Info 2012 05 02 18 10 21 5X900 3 21105 FJSVrex INFO 21105 8X9000 3 server tatus is changed
42. SEPIE E AT EEEE E E E E E E A E EE A E EE E E A E ste aveavieus Gs 17 6 Network Parameter Auto Configurauon for Cloning Int ge s eripere retirer na treten nh beet SR EASE ES s Ureta 135 17 6 1 Operation Checks and Preparations ia e a MaN a E R E E E T R E G E E S TPOS C emine SODES E 1704 Modifying the Operatig ERVMOIIEIM 1 ici rre titre tere eerta PH HER eoat e reir Foto HERE ANSER eb ee horn EHE RE ARNESES 142 Ghaptor 19 Sarver Willer cii RM n S Stnns 144 s Totus DIDI oe iret arr RA n pd En preda ob epe Ere E ae terr tat Roc EEA 144 Da Sets Tor Sarver o WIRCDONGE ee e i I m ets erra tiic reete adt rre e ic e eren eer ea des 144 xii T5 3 Cb npiugm Serves Sever SEDIS cuoio prn tnr m rater as e i he RO e IE UE ren tee v e n tasa 147 TRA Canc ling Server Switchover Songs cerae titer ei tet m EE ERE OR ENSS EE ERO FO D ORE ERREUR Hi 147 Chapter 19 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs 19 1 Exporting Pawer Consumption Data n iter rte He deii akariri rede else eb ee b evil ie fete mee iie leie usd 19 2 Displaying Power Consuimpton Data CAIB iid recreo orte rt e eh o t Re e Re eet RR e t rH n eats Appendix A User Interface S D ROR COME itii HERE GIEEIHORSEEDIET EDITED HII THAI IHUPIINII OPERE ron EP 155 FL wage crudo M 155 p wvEcinBOI e V M
43. ServerAgent as the section name This is required when registering multiple agents together for Windows or Linux managed servers Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line The change operation cannot be used for this section server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section VM Host Management Information Section Name Enter Server VMHost as the section name This is required when registering multiple agents together for VM host managed servers Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section 205 vm login name Enter the name of the user account used to remotely log into the VM Host vm login passwd Enter the password of the above user account for remote login vm passwd enc Enter one of the following If the password is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted Monitoring Settings Section Name Enter MonitorSetting as the section name Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section ping timeout Enter the time out value in sec
44. Settings for Managed Servers in the Design Guide VE All servers must use the same redundancy configuration if any and the same number of redundant paths for LAN and SAN connections All servers must also be able to access the same network and storage devices Note that LAN or fibre channel switches connected in a cascade configuration are viewed as a single device Some applications may require manual adjustments to function properly after cloning If necessary manually perform such adjustments before or after the cloning process When backing up or restoring system images or collecting and deploying cloning images up to four processes can be executed simultaneously If four processes are already being executed any additional image operations will enter a standby state Moreover server switchover which is executed using the backup and restore method or any restore process performed during failback will also enter a standby state When using auto recovery and manual switchover operations with the backup restore method execute a maximum of three system image backup restore or cloning image collection deployment operations at the same time After collecting or deploying a cloning image software required for connecting to external servers etc when the OS is started may not start correctly In this case restart the operating system after collecting or deploying the cloning image For managed servers on which the Watchdog function
45. This chapter explains how to register modify and delete user accounts Add User Account Only privileged users can perform this operation When using Single Sign On register user information in ServerView Operations Manager beforehand 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed 2 Click Add The Add User Account dialog is displayed 3 Set the following User ID Enter a string of up to 16 characters The first character must be a letter and the remaining characters can include alphanumeric characters underscores hyphens and periods Please note that user names are case sensitive Password Confirm password When using Single Sign On Enter a string using alphanumeric characters or symbols in the range of 8 to 64 characters When not using Single Sign On Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols Authority level Select either Manage or Monitor There must be at least one privileged user 4 Click OK The user account is created Change User Account Settings Both privileged users and general users can perform this operation Privileged users can modify any account information General users can only modify their own password 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed 2 Select the user account to modify and click Change The Change User Ac
46. VE Change the SNMP trap destination set for the management blade and LAN switch blades Set the SNMP trap destination to the new IP address of the admin server Note Depending on the LAN switch blade used setting an SNMP trap destination may restrict SNMP access to that switch blade In a clustered manager configuration set the physical IP addresses of both the primary and secondary nodes as SNMP trap destinations If the LAN switch blade is set to only grant access from known IP addresses be sure to give permissions to the physical IP addresses of both the primary and secondary cluster nodes as is done with trap destination settings For details refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade to be used 0 00606000090909909929099909909990000000999990990909009090009909999090909099000000000099999099099909000000909099909990990990000000900999999 Change the IP address set within the operating system Change the IP address following the instructions given in the operating system s manual If the admin LAN has been made redundant change the admin IP address set in the following tools or products PRIMECLUSTER GLS BACS Intel PROSet Refer to the manual of each product for usage details Ina clustered manager configuration change the cluster IP address according to the instructions given in Changing the IP Address of a Clustered Manager Change the IP address registered as the manager s admin IP address Use the rcxadm mgrc
47. When SEVERITY is Critical or Major Error is displayed When SEVERITY is Minor Warning is displayed When SEVERITY is Informational Info is displayed 184 A 12 Dialogs This section explains how to enable or disable display of some of the confirmation or warning dialogs used by the ROR console Use the following procedure to change dialog display settings 1 Select Tools Options from the ROR console menu The Options dialog is displayed 2 Click the Dialog category title and change the following settings in the displayed area Dialog display options checkboxes To disable further display of a confirmation or warning dialog select its corresponding checkbox To restore display of a disabled dialog deselect its corresponding checkbox Select All button Selects all dialog checkboxes Deselect All button Deselects all dialog checkboxes 3 Click Apply The new settings are applied 185 Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files This appendix explains the format of the CSV system configuration files used by Resource Orchestrator s pre configuration function B 1 Obtaining the System Configuration File CSV Format The system configuration files can be obtained as follows From the selection window of the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM Windows Setting the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM in the CD ROM drive automatically displays the screen below Select Tool and click
48. a list of spare servers assigned to the resource selected in the server resource tree The table below shows the information displayed in the Recovery Settings tab 180 Recovery Settings Tab Server Name The name used to identify a physical OS or VM host is displayed Admin LAN IP Address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Primary Server The name of the server on which the physical OS or VM host is operating is displayed Switchover State The current switchover state is displayed Spare Server The configured spare server is displayed The switchover state is indicated by an arrow shown next to the currently active Primary Server The messages Switchover in progress Failback in progress or Takeover in progress are displayed respectively during a server switchover failback or takeover process If more than one spare server has been set the first server listed is the one that is currently running Clicking a column heading in this list will change the color of the selected column and sort the displayed recovery settings in either ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to move forwards and backwards by single pages and to the first or last page A 8 Image List Tab The Image List tab displays information regarding available images Those lists can be used to manage both system images and cloning images The following two tables list the items that
49. appropriate action or a specified time approximately five minutes has elapsed 6 5 Status Panel Operations This section describes the operations that can be performed from the status panel Figure 6 7 BladeViewer Tool Icons Contact icon 2 zi y io Update 2009 06 29 16 13 59 TENE Total 10 rem VMware EC 9l um 1 Sumit 9l wn 2 Byent 2 291 Contact icon Displays the Contact dialog This dialog shows the contact information that was set for the entire system Tools icon Enables selection of the following menu options Display Label List Displays the Label List dialog Displays a list of labels This list also allows modification of labels and comments For details on editing labels and comments refer to 6 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments Set Contact Information Displays the Set Contact Information dialog For details on modifying contact information refer to 6 5 2 Editing Contacts Change Password Displays the Change Password dialog For details on changing passwords refer to 6 5 3 Changing Passwords Help icon The Help is displayed 6 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments Clicking on the Tools icon and selecting Display Label List from the drop down list displays the Label List dialog shown below When applications are defined with labels this list can provide a quick overview of the applications running on each server Figure 6 8 Label List Se
50. chapter provides an overview of the pre configuration function and explains how to use system configuration files 12 1 Overview Using the Pre configuration function it is possible to create system definition files that can be later used to setup a Resource Orchestrator environment Importing system configuration files makes it easy to perform various registration settings in one operation This prevents the operating mistakes induced by sequences of individual manual configuration steps The pre configuration function can be used in the following situations New Installation From a traditional work office or another off site location define the various parameters required for Resource Orchestrator and record them in a system configuration file Next send this definition file to your actual system location machine room and import the file into Resource Orchestrator using the import functionality of the ROR console This single operation automates the registration of all the servers defined in the system configuration file Backing up a System Configuration Using the export function of the ROR console the current Resource Orchestrator configuration can be exported to a system configuration file Batch Re configuration The registration settings of already registered resources can be modified easily by exporting the current configuration to a system configuration file and editing the desired configuration items before re import
51. collecting the cloning image Some programs may experience problems when the same server name exists If such programs have been installed configure their services not to start automatically This has to be configured before collecting cloning images When using the network parameter auto configuration function check the operation before performing collection For details refer to 17 6 1 Operation Checks and Preparations When the target of operation is a PRIMEQUEST server confirm that the boot option settings on the target server and the boot option set in BIOS are configured for Legacy boot When the settings of one of the servers are UEFI configure the settings after changing to Legacy boot For details on how to change boot options refer to 9 1 10 Changing Boot Options When using local disks as system disks and iSCSI storage as data disks refer to the advisory notes described in Table 8 1 Supported Storage Device Configurations in 8 1 1 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide VE Windows Enable NetBIOS over TCP IP A volume license is required for cloning and must be entered during the installation of Resource Orchestrator Agent Refer to 2 2 1 2 Collecting and Checking Required Information and 2 2 2 Installation Windows Hyper V in the Setup Guide VE for details If no volume license is entered during the agent installation or if this information is changed after installation edit the following l
52. details on the resource status refer to Table 6 3 Status Icons in 6 3 1 Status Panel A Information If a comment has been defined for a server clicking on its label displays the Server Properties dialog The Server Properties dialog displays the comment and label set for the selected server as well as its OS name server name for a physical OS the physical server name for a VM guest the VM guest name and IP address For details on defining comments refer to 6 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments Storage Blade A power lamp is displayed in the top part of each storage blade The table below shows the status and meaning associated with each power lamp Table 6 12 Storage Blade Power Lamps B UT A Gray not lit Power OFF Power OFF status 6 3 3 2 VM Guest List When a VM host is displayed in the blade panel clicking the VM host OS icon displays a list of hosted VM guests with their statuses 16 Figure 6 4 Blade Panel VM Guest List o d y io Update 2009 06 29 16 10 28 E Total 10 fa Advanced gt gt T Chassis gt Seach 4 gt 1 rif E E vmware El rem E Vmware E VMware m caa r bx620 2 4 eB ps0 w bx620 4 6 M b 620 5 e web w2x3 12 win200312 05 fujtsu a LY Windows O LY Windows Ko A VM guest icon is shown on the left side of each VM guest displayed in the VM guest list Table 6 13 VM Guest Icon VM guest A See For details on th
53. has been released The settings of tagged VLANs for NICs have been released Check that applications are running properly on the source server 5 Release the source server from maintenance mode This step is not required if the Release Maintenance Mode after collection checkbox was enabled in the Collect a Cloning Image dialog a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the source server or its physical OS and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu The Release Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed 128 b Click OK The target server is released from maintenance mode While a cloning image is being collected no other operations can be performed on that image or other versions of that image images sharing the same image name Communication errors between the admin and source servers resulting in an image collection failure or an unknown status on the source server may be caused by improper use of the network parameter auto configuration function described in 17 6 Network Parameter Auto Configuration for Cloning Images Auto configuration settings were made for the admin LAN Auto configuration settings were made for the public LAN using IP addresses contained within the admin LAN subnet range Log in to the source server and check for the presence of such settings in the definition file for the network parameter auto configuration function If incorrect settings were made
54. hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address that was set on this power monitoring device This IP address will be used to collect power consumption data from this power monitoring device SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this power monitoring device Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens This SNMP community will be used to collect power consumption data from this power monitoring device via SNMP protocol Voltage Enter the voltage V supplied to this power monitoring device Enter a number between 10 and 999 Power consumption data is calculated using the electrical current value obtained from this power monitoring device and its specified voltage Comments Enter a comment that describes this power monitoring device Enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e G amp Note A line break is counted as one character 0606060600000000000000000000900900900900909090090906090090090000000000000000000000000009090909090090990909090006060606069 9 3 Click OK The registered power monitoring device will be displayed under the power monitoring devices tree If collection of power data is disabled in the option settings data will not be collected even if power monitoring devices are registered Change power data collection settings according to 9 6
55. image backup can be created as a precautionary measure before performing maintenance tasks such as applying patches installing or modifying installed software Hardware maintenance A system image backup can be used to guard against hardware problems such as disk failures Note Regardless of the boot environment local SAN iSCSI and RAID configurations only the contents of the first disk boot disk recognized by the managed server s BIOS can be backed up and restored The contents of other disks data disks cannot be backed up and restored To properly backup and restore such data disks it is recommended to use dedicated backup software or the copy functions available in storage devices When the first disk contains multiple partitions Windows drive Linux VMware partition all partitions are backed up Table 16 1 Examples of system image backup and restore targets Windows Disk Name Windows Drive Name Target of Backup and Restore As managed servers are restarted during backup and restore operations their applications should be stopped beforehand Restore operations can only be performed for the servers from which a backup has been collected The first partition must be the boot partition The operations for backup and restore of VM hosts differ depending on the server virtualization software used For an explanation of the behavior differences that occur when VM guests are included in the VM host s boot disk refer
56. image files are actually copied over to the new location this step may take some time to complete Run the rcxadm imagemgr command on the primary node Also specify a directory on the shared disk for the new image file storage directory 3 Un mount the shared disk from the primary node Un mount the shared disk for which settings were performed in step 1 from the primary node 8 6 Changing the Password for the Resource Orchestrator Database Use the following procedure to change the password for the Resource Orchestrator database 64 1 Log on to the admin server with OS administrative privileges 2 Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE 3 Change the password for the Resource Orchestrator database Execute the rexadm dbctl modify command Enter the new password interactively Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm dbctl modify passwd RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm dbctl modify passwd RETURN Inaclustered manager configuration bring offline all manager resources except for the shared disk move all cluster resources from the primary node to the secondary node then execute the rcxadm dbctl modify command on all the nodes that are hosting cluster resources 4 Restart the manager Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE
57. is enabled cloning operations on that server may be aborted by an automatic restart or shutdown The Watchdog is a function which automatically restarts or shuts down non responsive servers when their operating system does not respond for a given period It is therefore highly recommended to disable the Watchdog function before a cloning operation For details refer to the manual of the managed server When using MAK license activation with Windows Server 2008 Sysprep can be executed a maximum of three times Since Sysprep is executed when deploying a cloning image cloning image collection and deployment cannot be executed four or more times Therefore it is recommended not to collect cloning images from managed servers that have had cloning images deployed but to collect them from a dedicated master server Asthere is a chance that data will be damaged do not perform collection or deployment of a cloning image while performing an iSCSI connection using a software initiator When using data disks use the hardware initiator 17 2 Collecting When installing servers using the cloning function first collect a cloning image from a source server Collected cloning images can later be used for the deployment of other servers A cloning image can be collected only from a managed server on which an agent has been registered For details on registering agents refer to Chapter 7 Installing Software and Registering Agents on Managed Servers in
58. logical IP address is 192 168 4 100 before being changed DHCP Server Configuration file see usr share doc dhcp dhcpd conf sample ddns update style none option vendor class identifier PXEClient option dhcp server identifier 192 168 4 100 subnet 192 168 4 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 Note Change the IP address in this line to the new takeover logical IP address 006060606200600929990909090000009090909999909090000009009092090990900000000009099999909090000000009992990900060000009099999 6 Unmount the shared disk Un mount the shared disk from the primary node 7 Log in to the admin server s secondary node Log in to the operating system of the admin server s secondary node with administration privileges 8 Change takeover the logical IP address Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line interface to remove virtual interface settings from the PRIMECLUSTER resource register the resource and change the PRIMECLUSTER GLS configuration For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual 9 Change the cluster configuration Use the cluster RMS Wizard to change the GLS resource set in the cluster service of either one of the cluster nodes After completing the configuration save it and execute the following operations Configuration Generate Configuration Activate 10 Start the Manager s cluster service Use the cluster administration view Cluster Admin to start the Manager s cluster service
59. managed servers as public LAN IP addresses no longer need to be manually and separately configured on each cloned server To use this feature the following settings must first be defined When not Using LAN Redundancy IP address Subnet mask 135 When Using LAN Redundancy Linux The NIC switching mode Physical IP address takeover function of PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services Figure 17 2 Setup Procedure When Using the Network Parameter Auto configuration Function Setup Procedure 1 Create Definition Files 2 Enable the Network Parameter Auto Configuration Function Operation Checks and Preparations 1 Execute the Network Parameter Setup Command 2 Collect a Cloning Image amp Note Physical Servers The network parameter auto configuration function cannot be used on the admin LAN If it is used deployment commands may fail when deploying new servers may fail or communication issues may occur during collection or deployment of cloning images Linux When using LAN redundancy cancel any network redundancy settings that were made on managed servers using PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services before deploying new servers If not cancelled deployment commands may fail when deploying new servers Once the deployment of new servers has completed redundancy network configurations for the admin LAN or other networks that are not handled by the network parameter auto configuration feature should b
60. manager displayed in the middle of the Failover Cluster Management window and select Properties from the displayed menu The arget resource Properties window will be displayed Click Add on the Registry Replication tab The Registry Key window will be displayed Configure the above registry key in Root registry key Click OK When configuring the second registry key as well repeat steps b to d After configuration of the registry keys is complete click Apply Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 51 12 Configure the dependencies of the resources of the manager service or application Configure the dependencies of resources based on the following table If some resources have been configured select AND from AND OR and add the dependent resource Resource for Configuration Dependent Resource PXE Services DHCP Server 13 Restart the manager Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Bring this service or application online from the displayed menu Linux Manager A Information When configuring a cluster system in an environment that already has an admin LAN registered in addition to the installation procedure for the cluster system perform steps 1 to 2 and 4 to 11 In that case set the manager that is operating now as the primary node of the cluster system 1 Stop cluster applications Use the cluster system s
61. of available operations in a popup menu For details on popup menus refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus If a problem occurs on a resource a status icon indicating the problem is shown on top of the resource s own icon For details on status icons refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE Clicking a resource icon will show information related to that resource in the Main Panel Use this information to investigate the problem 165 A Information For a VM host coordinated with VMware vCenter Server the name IP address or host name entered when registering with VMware vCenter Server will be displayed 060600600000000099099099099090000000090909999090900000000909099090909099090000000090090909909909909090000000009909090990990900000000909999 network device External LAN switches those other than LAN switch blades managed in Resource Orchestrator are shown in a tree view Resources are sorted and displayed by name in alphabetical order Resources displayed in the resource tree are represented by an icon and their resource name For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE For a non registered resource one of the following registration states is displayed at the end of the resource s name Table A 18 Resource Registration States Unregistered The resource was automatically detected but has not been registered yet Registering The re
62. operation management view Cluster Admin and stop the manager cluster service cluster application 2 Mount the shared disk Primary node Mount the shared disk for managers on the primary node 3 Stop automatic startup of the dhcpd service Primary node and Secondary node Disable automatic startup of the dhcpd service by executing the following command chkconfig dhcpd off lt RETURN gt 4 Copy dynamic disk files Primary node a Copy the files and directory on the local disk of the primary node to the shared disk for managers Execute the following command tar cf copy target tar xf C Shared disk mount point Fujitsu ROR SVROR RETURN Files and Directory to Copy etc dhcpd conf 1 letc dhcp dhcpd conf 2 var lib dhcpd When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 2 When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 b After copying the files change source file name by executing the following command Make sure a name like source file name old is specified for the rarget file name mv i source file name target file name RETURN 5 Configure symbolic links for the shared disk Primary node Configure symbolic links from the files and directory on the local disk of the primary node for the files on the shared disk Execute the following command 52 10 In s shared disk local disk cK RETURN Table 7 1 Files to Link Shared Disk Local Disk Mount destination of shared disk Fujitsu
63. perform the following operations to fix communication errors Fix network settings on destination servers Run the rcxadm lanctl unset command described in 17 6 3 Clearing Settings to reset network settings to their original values If the admin LAN IP address is not set on the source server set it manually to restore communications between the admin server and the source server Re collect the cloning image Correct any errors found in the source server s network parameter auto configuration function definition file and re collect the cloning image from the source server Delete any cloning image that was collected with incorrect network parameters 17 3 Deploying Once collected cloning images can be deployed to one or more destination servers Cloning images collected from the source server can only be deployed to destination servers which satisfy the following conditions Destination servers should be in either normal warning unknown or stop status Destination servers should have been placed into maintenance mode Destination servers should be of the same model as the source server I O virtualization should be used when destination servers are spare servers Cloning images cannot be deployed to managed servers where VM hosts or VM guests are running Preparations When the configurations of managed servers are as below execute the following commands before deploying cloning images Ina SAN data environment
64. ports WWNs could be configured as follows WWNN value provided by I O Virtualization Option 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 Values to set in the HBA address rename settings dialog WWNN value 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 HBA port number on board 2 Values actually set by the admin server on the HBA WWPNs are generated automatically WWNN value for ports 1 and 2 of the HBA t 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 WWPN value for HBA port 1 21 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 WWPN value for HBA port 2 22 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 A Information Lm WWN settings are applied to managed servers during server startup 3 Check the Restart the server checkbox if the server is to be restarted 95 Information are Select server restart in the following cases When installing an operating system immediately after performing the above settings Insert the operating system installation CD in the target server and select server restart Once the server has been restarted its WWN settings are applied and the operating system installation starts When an operating system is already running if changing storage settings Click lt OK gt to restart the target server and apply its WWN settings 42 The server restart is not required in other cases The WWN that has been set is enabled at the next restart 4 Click OK A Information When using a server without an OS the resource name displayed on the server resource tree is the same as that of the physical
65. referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE Repeat steps 6 to 11 for each managed server on which an agent is running Re configure the HBA address rename setup service When using the HBA address rename function change the IP address of the admin server that is set for the HBA address rename setup service according to 6 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide VE Back up managed servers If system image backups have already been collected from managed servers it is recommended to update those images in order to reflect the changes made above For details on system image backups refer to 9 2 Backup in the Operation Guide VE System images backed up before changing the admin IP address of the admin server cannot be restored anymore after the change It is recommended to delete all system images collected before change unless those images are specifically needed Collect a cloning image Physical Servers If cloning images have already been collected from managed servers it is recommended to update those images to reflect the change made above For details on cloning image collection refer to 17 2 Collecting Cloning images collected before changing the admin IP address of the admin server cannot be deployed anymore after the change It is recommended to delete all cloning images collected before change unless those images are specifically needed Note
66. registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series servers Use the following procedure to register SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series servers 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series from the popup menu The Register SPARC Enterprise dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Physical Server Name Register agent checkbox Remote management controller ILOM XSCF Controller type IP address User ID Password SNMP Community Admin LAN IP address With Agent Registration OS Type User ID Password 45 Physical Server Name Enter a name to assign to this physical server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens Register agent checkbox Without Agent Registration Automatic registration of agents is not performed after server registration After registering servers register agents as required If registering agents register agents after checking the product name is displayed in the General Area of Resource Details tab Executing Update acquires the latest information With Agent Registration Agents are automatically registered after server registration is completed Remote management controller ILOM XSCF For SPARC Enterprise M3000 servers Controller type Selec
67. server 5 Restart the HBA address rename setup service The HBA address rename setup service must be running to use the HBA address rename function For details on how to configure these settings refer to Chapter 6 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide VE 7 5 When using PRIMEQUEST Servers This section explains how to register resources when using PRIMEQUEST servers Registering Chassis For PRIMEQUEST Servers Registering PRIMEQUEST Servers 7 5 1 Registering Chassis For PRIMEQUEST Servers By registering a chassis every partition mounted in the chassis will be automatically detected and displayed as an unregistered server in the server resource tree Register these managed servers individually For details on registering servers refer to 7 5 2 Registering PRIMEQUEST Servers Use the following procedure to register a chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register PRIMEQUEST from the popup menu The Register Chassis dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Admin LAN IP address Enter the virtual IP address that was set on the chassis management board on Enter the IP address using periods Chassis name Enter a name to assign to this chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphen
68. simplify the recovery procedure in case of the deployed cloning image is faulty For details on backing up refer to 16 2 Backup Note Cloning images cannot be deployed to servers that have been set up as spare servers for other managed servers when not using I O virtualization Cancel any such settings before deploying a cloning image VLAN settings on adjacent LAN switch ports cannot be deployed during server cloning LAN switch VLAN settings should be set up before deploying a cloning image For details on how to configure VLAN settings on LAN switches refer to 7 3 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches When deploying a cloning image back to its source server the source server should be backed up before deployment For details on backing up refer to 16 2 Backup If the deployed cloning image is faulty and causes deployment errors use the following procedure to collect a new cloning image 1 Restore the system image that was backed up before cloning image deployment 2 Fix any incorrect settings on the source server 3 Collect a new cloning image 4 Delete the faulty cloning image When deploying cloning images to multiple managed servers if the managed servers belong to different subnets cloning images cannot be deployed When using PRIMEQUEST servers cloning images cannot be deployed to partitions for which UEFI has been set When collecting and deploying cloning images configure the BIOS settings and boot op
69. string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens C 3 Click OK The chassis name is changed 9 1 2 Changing Server Names This section explains how to change physical server names Names of physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests can be changed by a user with administrative authority Once changed new names are automatically reflected in the ROR console Use the following procedure to change the name of a physical server 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Physical Server Name Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens C 3 Click OK The server name is changed 66 4 If the network parameter auto configuration function is used in the deployment of the cloning images the Physical Server Name set in the definition file must also be changed For details on the network parameter auto configuration function refer to 17 6 Network Parameter Auto Configuration for Cloning Images 9 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses This section explains how to change admin IP addresses To change the IP addresses of remote management controllers refer to 9 1 5 Changing Server Management U
70. switch name node name for management purposes Admin LAN IP address User ID LAN switch blade only Password LAN switch blade only Privileged password LAN switch blade only Connection method LAN switch blade only SNMP community name Complete the changes to the settings on the target LAN switch before performing this procedure Use the following procedure to change LAN switch settings 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree or network resource device tree right click the target LAN switch name and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify LAN Switch dialog is displayed 2 Make changes to the values as needed 3 Click OK The settings for the LAN switch are changed with the entered information G amp Note It is possible to set the IP address of the target switch to another unregistered LAN switch However this will result in the Resource Orchestrator configuration being inconsistent with the actual network configuration If the IP address of the target switch is set to the same address as that of another unregistered LAN switch unintentionally change back the target LAN switch IP address to its original value according to the instructions given in this section If there are more than one LAN switch with inconsistent IP address configurations delete all registered LAN switches according to 11 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches first then perform Discover and Register according
71. tese tns sites intesa te senten nnns enne nnns Al Registermg VIOM Coordination 2 cinere er ite tereti cas d He eee dici Pot D ede eR 1 1 1 Remscmuns VIOM Server Profiles rtr teretes ta tea so seio PORE e Fe Ree Fee reni ees eiie a eo EELS a 72 Bemutemig VM Maliseetnent SONWANE 1a decet Hte tiende Lee D Pere Eie de CERERE EOE E N easa qo When using Blade Serveis eiciia eon hne Oen rte Hee pude here EE eren p E Cua Uo CANS SIG M 32 Repstenng Blade SEPVOLS se me tederedtetecee eite iaee a lie cn totae De ite eritis din ete det ete berti idee dires Tol Texa Regsterug LAN Switeb Blades nian aeneae eere cte eed rer ee HE EIE RI eei LE ELO icit 7 3 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches AAS oniuting VLANs omn External Potts eni ainra aa i reste rhe Det eiae Dn dope iens die be STER eee ose ee detti Too tolum VLANS ON DOR POlfa n i rro e tee tnt t etre EO ete ed ende ttp er e ib de aie HERR REL ER ce pura cm as PIU Mer oin M SENEE TA When eng Rack Mount arid Tower Servers enitn re tenementa NSE a eee epe tr es E Fei EE aeaa TS dee Eden plo 34 7 4 1 Registering Rack Mount or Tower Servers VAS Registering LAN Switches arnore o aer rere ERE Eao E o TETEA HIERRO SEP E E VEEE NE THEOD EGET ECRIRE e RGESETER 7 3 HBA address rondine SETIBR iine tei HE detecte tete pete iet EEEE Eos SEE EER ora EERE Tei nesini 40 Eg Wieniin PRIMEQUEST SENEE Pe 7
72. the Setup Guide VE A cloning image can be collected from a managed server that satisfies the following conditions 123 The status is either normal or warning Has been placed into maintenance mode Cloning images cannot be collected from VM hosts or VM guests Preparations Install the desired operating system and necessary applications on the managed server from which a cloning image will be collected Additionally apply any required patches and other necessary settings Make sure that the source server operates properly after those steps When the configurations of managed servers are as below execute the following commands before collecting cloning images Ina SAN data environment using a built in disk boot and a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN When using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server management software ServerView is selected Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe R
73. the etc services file service name port number protocol name nfagent 23458 tcp Solaris Use a command such as vi to change the following line in the etc services file service name port number protocol name rcvat 23458 tep 2 Restart the server on which the port number has been changed 9 1 7 Changing VM Host Login Account Information This section explains how to change VM host login account information If the login account information user ID and password of the VM host entered when the VM host was registered is changed change the login account information of the VM host that was registered in Resource Orchestrator The method for changing the VM host login account is shown below 70 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target VM host and select Modify VM Host Login Account from the popup menu The Change Login Information dialog is displayed 2 Enter the new login account information that was changed on the VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host 3 Click OK VM host login information is changed 9 1 8 Changing the VLAN Settings of LAN Switch Blades This section explains how to change LAN switch VLAN settings The VLAN settings of the LAN switch blade ports connected to the physical servers can be reconfigured normally
74. the command refer to 5 9 rcxadm lanctl in the Reference Guide Command VE Physical Servers Network parameter settings for interfaces not designated in the definition file cannot be released Linux When this command is executed any LAN redundancy settings for managed servers are unset If LAN redundancy has been set up for the admin LAN set the LAN redundancy settings again manually 600606000029000000090999099000000090990909000000900990909000009099099090990900090990909090000009290909909900000090990000000999090900000909299 17 6 4 Modifying the Operating Environment Use the following procedures to modify the operating environment 142 Deploying New Managed Servers with Automated Public LAN Configuration Use the following procedure to add new managed servers and automate their public LAN settings using the network parameter auto configuration function 1 Register the newly added servers 2 Perform the following procedure on a reference server chosen between already running servers a Clearing Network Parameter Settings Execute the rcxadm lanctl unset command to clear the network parameters configuration b Editing the definition file Set up a node entry in the definition file ipaddr conf with the server name interface entries and other information for the server to be added c Manually execute network parameter settings Execute the rcxadm lanctl set command to apply the network parameters and ensure that t
75. the reference server s behavior and configuration 1 Manually Execute the Network Parameter Setup Command Execute the network parameter configuration command on the reference server holding the prepared definition file and check that the defined settings are applied correctly Executing the Command Before collecting the cloning image run the following command to apply the definition file and verify that the defined settings are actually reflected on the reference server This command also activates network parameter auto configuration for any cloning image subsequently collected Once this command has been executed the network configuration that was described in the definition file will be performed automatically Windows gt Installation_folde Agent bin rcxadm lanctl set lt RETURN gt Linux opt FJS Vrexat bin rexadm lanctl set lt RETURN gt For details on the command refer to 5 9 rcxadm lanctl in the Reference Guide Command VE Validating settings without LAN redundancy Use a command provided by the operating system ipconfig for Windows and ifconfig for Linux to confirm that network interface settings without redundancy were correctly applied Validating settings with LAN redundancy Linux Use the following commands to confirm that network interface settings with redundancy were correctly applied Using the opt FJS Vhanet usr sbin dsphanet Command opt FJSVhanet usr sbin dsphanet RETURN
76. the virtual storage resource is modified 9 8 4 Changing Disk Resource Basic Information This section explains how to modify the basic information for disk resources The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to modify the basic information for disk resources 1 Select the target virtual storage in the ROR console storage tree The disk resource list is displayed in the Resource List tab 2 From the disk resource list right click the target disk resource and select Modify Registration Settings from the displayed menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 81 3 Modify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 4 Click OK The basic information for disk resources is modified 82 Chapter 10 Configuring the Operating Environments of Managed Servers This chapter explains how to install software to the registered managed servers and set up their operating environment Figure 10 1 Procedure for Setting up Operating Environments Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches f necessary Configuring HBA address rename if this is to be used 1 Software Installation and Agent Registration 2 Cloning Image Deployment Install the operating system Install required software Install the Resource Orchestrator agent Register the agent
77. to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE If VM guests on the boot disk are not to be backed up and restored VM guest files should be moved to another disk To preserve the configuration of the server virtualization software used VM guests should be backed up at the same time as VM hosts During backup because the target VM host will be automatically set to VM maintenance mode the VM host should be in a state that allows VM maintenance mode to be set When backing up a VM host in a high availability configuration all VM guests stored on shared disks should be migrated to another VM host beforehand After backing up the VM host migrate the VM guests back to their original VM host Refer to the server virtualization software manual and D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE for information on how to back up and migrate VM guests or about the VM maintenance mode To preserve the configuration of the server virtualization software used VM guests backed up at the time of the VM host s backup should also be restored when restoring a VM host Note that this is not required if no changes likely to alter the virtualization software configuration were made e g changes such as addition or deletion of a VM guest or changing the placeholder for VM guest definition 115 files During restore because the target VM host will be automatically set to VM maintenance mode the VM ho
78. to normal Info 2012 05 02 18 10 13 BX600 10 21105 FJSVrex INFO 21105 8X0600 10 server satus is changed to normal Info 2012 05 02 18 09 33 BX600 7 21105 FJSVrex INFO 21105 8X600 7 se ver status is changed to normal Info 2012 05 02 18 09 24 BX600 an2 21146 FJSVrex INFO 21146 8X600 an2 LAN switch status is changed to nor Info 2012 05 02 18 09 16 BX900 42n2 21146 FJSVrex INFO 21146 8X900 4an2 LAN switch status is changed to nor Info 2012 05 02 18 09 08 BX 900 42n1 21146 FJSVrex INFO 21146 8X900 1an1 LAN switch status is changed to nor Info 2012 05 22 18 09 00 B8X60042n1 21146 FJSVrex INFO 21146 8X600 an1 LAN switch status is changed to nor info 2012 05 22 18 08 50 5X900 15 21105 FJSVrex INFO 21105 8X020 18 sarver satus is changed to normal Info 2012 0502 13 08 50 5X900 17 21105 FJSVrex INFO 21105 8X000 17 server status is changed to normal a s The event log displays a history of events that have occurred on managed resources These events are added to the log automatically Each event provides the following information 183 Event Information Status Displays the level of the event There are three levels Error Warning or Info Date Date and time at which the event occurred Resource Name Name of the resource associated with the event Event ID Identifier related to the event No event ID is displayed for network resources Event Log Content of the event When the link in the Event Log column is clicked an error dialog
79. using a built in disk boot and a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN Linux Manager When using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename 129 When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server management software ServerView is selected Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename and the following model PRIMERGY BX960 S1 Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt If the above command has not been executed on the server from which the cloning image is being collected the cloning image may not be collected correctly Delete that cloning image and then redo the cloning image collection t is recommended to back up destination servers before deploying cloning images as this will
80. 0 M9000 server is selected LAN Switch blades The number of LAN switches mounted in the chassis is displayed Displayed only when the chassis of a blade server is selected 169 WS See Refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE for details on resource statuses 060606206060009090000000929099009900009090990909000009009099290990900009090909009090900009009099090000009909090000000099099090900009009990900000909299 Hardware Details Area Launch Management Blade Web UI The link to the management blade s Web interface is displayed Not displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Launch XSCF Web UI The link to the remote management controller XSCF Web UI is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Partition Configuration The following information is displayed only when the chassis of a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected Partition ID The partition number is displayed Partition name The name used to identify a partition is displayed SB The ID of the system board used to configure a partition is displayed IOB The ID of the IO board used to configure a partition is displayed GSPB Giga LAN SAS and PCI Box Interface Board The ID of the GSPB used to configure a partition is displayed Reserved SB The ID of the Reserved SB assigned to a partition is displayed LSB The partition logical system board LS
81. 000000000920999 93 6 When the import is completed successfully a message is displayed in the Recent Operations area Point e 06060606060600092099090909909090000060009009990990909000000900900929099099090609000006000900999909900000600000099090990000000c0000602992299 Error handling The processing of resource registration or change is executed after the verification of the system configuration file during import If an error occurs during the verification process which means an invalid value exists in the system configuration file an error message is displayed only in the event log Correct the system configuration file and import it again Invalid content also includes invalid section headers If there is an error message displayed but the values in the specified line are all correct check whether the section header is correct or not If an error occurs during registration and change process an error message is displayed in both the recent operations area and the event log In this case the process is finished up to the previous line setting that is before the system configuration file line number which message is displayed Correct the system configuration file and rectify the problem then import it again The process will resume from the position where it stopped Import log file The import log is saved in the following location on the manager In cases where an error occurs in the verification step which means the pr
82. 00000909090990990990990909000000909990090909090000000090929299 A 5 Resource List Tab The Resource List tab in the Main Panel displays a list of resources related to the resource that was selected in the resource tree For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE The table below shows the information displayed in the Resource List for each selectable resource Server Resources Information on all registered chassis servers and LAN switches Chassis Information on registered servers and LAN switch blades mounted in the selected chassis is displayed For PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers information on the partitions configured on the chassis is displayed Server Information on the physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests running on the selected server Physical OS Information on the selected physical OS VM Host Information on the VM guests running on the selected VM host VM Guest Information on the selected VM guest Network Devices Information on the selected network device is displayed Unregistered Server Information on the selected unregistered server 167 Network Resources Information on all registered network resources is displayed Power Monitoring Devices Information on all registered power monitoring devices Management Software Information on all registered management software Management Software vCe
83. 00200909006000000090909090000009099090900000909090290990990000009090909909000000909900909000000909090900000000909090990900000099090909000009999 A physical server icon is displayed on the right side of the server blade power button The table below shows the meanings associated with each physical server icon 14 Table 6 8 Physical Server Icons P CJ Unregistered server Maintenance mode server Va See For details on the different physical server statuses refer to Table 6 3 Status Icons in 6 3 1 Status Panel When a server blade is used as the admin server the following admin server icon is displayed Table 6 9 Admin Server Icon Indicates the server used as the admin server An OS icon is displayed below the physical server icon The table below shows the meaning of each OS icon Table 6 10 OS Icons CO A Information Clicking on a VM host OS icon displays a detailed list of the VM guests operating on the selected VM host For details refer to 6 3 3 2 VM Guest List A user defined label is displayed with a resource icon below the OS icon If no label is set The OS name is displayed 15 If the OS name cannot be acquired because the OS has not been installed or for other reasons The server name physical server name or VM guest name is displayed The following table shows the resource icons used in BladeViewer and their associated meanings Table 6 11 Resource Icons wy See For
84. 0090900000092092999990000600909999999299 mgmt protocol Enter the type of the remote management controller ILOM XSCF to manage servers For M3000 XSCF For T Series ILOM mgmt user name Enter the user name For ILOM Admin privileges and for XSCF platadm privileges of a remote management controller to manage servers ILOM XSCF For XSCF on on Enter up to 31 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character For ILOM Enter between 4 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores _ or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character mgmt_passwd Enter the password of the remote management controller ILOM XSCF to manage a server For XSCF Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols For ILOM on Enter between 8 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols s C deg US ep A Rcs NETS sw jr ey rU PG a 35h44 x mgmt passwd enc Enter one of the following If mgmt passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted 200 PRIMEQUEST Server Management Data Section Name Enter PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyph
85. 009090906900000090909909090000090909042909000000009090990900000090090690900000090909090000000909009090000000090909000009999 The IP address displayed is the one set within the server s operating system For network interfaces that were made redundant using BACS software the information set in BACS within the operating system is displayed 172 Partition Configuration The following information is displayed only when a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected Partition name The name used to identify a partition is displayed SB The ID of the system board used to configure a partition is displayed IOB The ID of the IO board used to configure a partition is displayed GSPB Giga LAN SAS and PCI_Box Interface Board The ID of the GSPB used to configure a partition is displayed Reserved SB The ID of the Reserved SB assigned to a partition is displayed LSB The partition logical system board LSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers XSB The partition eXtended System Board XSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers A 6 3 Physical OS VM Host and VM Guest Attributes General Area Server name The name used to identify a physical OS VM host or VM guest is displayed Admin LAN IP Address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Not displayed for VM guests Status The status o
86. 0900099099099090909000000090090909909099000000000909090990909090900000000900090909909090000000009090909090990900000000090099999 If you change the size of the web browser when displaying graphs click the update button after doing so 152 Appendix A User Interface Resource Orchestrator includes two graphical user interfaces the ROR console and BladeViewer This appendix provides an overview of the ROR console For details on how to open and close the ROR console refer to Chapter 3 Login to the ROR Console in the Setup Guide VE For details on BladeViewer refer to Chapter 6 BladeViewer A 1 ROR Console This section explains how the Resource tab of the ROR console is organized The Resource tab of the ROR console is sometimes referred to as the ROR console Figure A 1 ROR Console Menus Status Panel lt BladeViewer gt gt gt button S ServerView TOt 1 a Resource List Ee ee al ee i Lu ee Server Resources Chassis List Server List LAN Switch Blade List Cham nace E Piare Resources D axso 102 108 2120 nme ljexsoo 19 192 103 2 105 nome 7 fillexs00 aj BX200 1 amp x300 2 amp x900 3 amp 900 4 8X900 5 Unregistered 8X200 5 amp X900 7 8x300 8 8909 9 iecent Operaborrs mmml m 1 t P GFF 20120502 10 07 22 20120502 10 07 2 Completes E 2012082 10 08 35 201208402 1906 94 Comp eet BX900 11 BX900 12
87. 0929090000000909090909090000090909059090000009090990990000000090909090000099909000009999 The local map and overall map buttons in the map selection area are initially disabled Selecting a chassis in the network view enables them Local map The local map displays all resources contained in the selected resource as well as their connections network links with other resources Point Up to two chassis can be expanded in the local map When two chassis are already expanded expanding a new one will close the chassis that was expanded first When selecting a chassis The following items are displayed Server blades VM hosts VM guests Virtual switches LAN switch blades LAN switches connected to LAN switch blades Chassis connected to LAN switches Network links When selecting a server The following items are displayed 99 NICs In addition the following items will be displayed when the selected server is a VM host VM guests Virtual switches Ports Network links When selecting a LAN switch blade The following items are displayed Ports Selecting a LAN switch blade will show all its ports For PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode a list of port groups is displayed Selecting a port group from the list will highlight in blue the ports belonging to the selected port group Moreover selecting a port from a switch in IBP mode will show a list of port groups t
88. 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings G Note Resource Orchestrator is not aware of the relationship between power monitoring devices and actual server resources Make sure to register the power monitoring devices that are connected to the server resources for which you want to monitor power consumption 7 8 Registering Admin LAN Subnets This section explains how to perform admin LAN subnet registration Registering admin LAN subnets enables management of managed servers belonging to subnets other than that of the admin LAN Use the following procedure to register an admin LAN subnet 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Admin LAN Subnet The Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 2 Click Add The Add Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 48 3 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Subnet name Set the subnet name for registration The name must start with an alphabetic character and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters long including underscores hyphens and periods Network address Configure the network address of the subnet used as the admin LAN Enter valid values for the network address Subnet mask Enter valid values for the subnet mask Gateway Enter the settings for the gateway used for communication with the admin server on the admin LAN 4 Click OK A Information When registering an admin LAN subnet for the first time change the simplif
89. 2 2 Changing the Port Number Used to Communicate with the Admin Server eese nennen 73 9 2 3 Changing the IP Address of the HBA address tenami Server iiie eet entrent bene bn tnit e RE Hie kisiye issii eeit 73 93 Changing VIONE Registration Sem eter tre ee de ee ee He OE e a e CH EUH EUdict 73 JA Chimene LAN Switeh SetlilBs nioemer dr tate tenter t feet tere e aei eee n etel ta deci eicit atv ee be evitan 74 245 1C honsing LAN wail Basie OB ceret rr etr e Erro crc bee catre dte beide diee 74 9 4 2 Changing VLANs Set for External Ports of LAN Switch Blades eese eeeeeeeter tenete tete rnnt thttnenetne ne 74 03 Re discoverme LAN er Ie MERERI TI 95 Chimene YM Managemen Soi wate DOUUEDA roce erret aer etn etnia E RI EHE re E E a Eaa edia aiie 77 9 6 Changing Power Monitoring Environment Sete 1 eere teer ted reete tr e b e o P E LEOTE CREE 78 2 5 Changing Environmental D ta Setitis 1b iro stri pr tree SED RR EE RESET D eS ER e Fe ER eC REDIERE AERE VE x EE 78 9 6 2 Canceling Collection Settings for Power Monitoring Environmints ueteri trt tette tb t te etn rte eei ebbe eek 78 9 5 3 Changing Power Monitor Devices cere eerte titer tete tet orem id cire tes ied etn bestias 79 9 7 Changing Momtoring Information SO Ig eee t teet aote tne yen ee rb save o x beta cba een ase EE ee EARS ERE XE RE RE sep su EE AR OR 79 7 1 Changing Monitoring Information SEITE
90. 20000092090000000990909900000909099090990900009090909090900000990990090900000909090900000090990990909000000990909000000909090900000909299 8 3 Changing the Maximum Number of System Image Versions Use the following procedure to change the maximum number of system image versions 1 Change the maximum number of system image versions 2 Confirm the maximum number of system image versions For details of the methods for changing and checking the generations of system images refer to 5 8 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE G amp Note If the specified limit is smaller than the number of existing system image versions older versions will not be deleted automatically In this case backing up a new system image will only delete the oldest version Delete unused versions of system images manually if they are no longer necessary For details refer to 16 5 Deleting If the ROR console has been already opened refresh the Web browser after changing the maximum number of system image versions 06060620200020909000009099209000000090990000000909090909900000090999099090400009099090900000090909090990000009099909090900000929909090000099299 62 8 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Use the following procedure to change the maximum number of cloning image versions 1 2 Change the maximum number of cloning image versions Check the maximum number of cloning image versions For details of the me
91. 255 255 0 the number of addresses in the specified range could be any value between 1 and 256 SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this LAN switch Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 3 Click lt OK gt Resource Orchestrator starts scanning for LAN switches within the specified network range Discovered LAN switches will be displayed under the network device tree with the status Unregistered Registration 1 In the ROR console network device tree right click a discovered LAN switch and select Register LAN Switch from the popup menu The Register LAN Switch dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined LAN switch name Enter the name to assign to this LAN switch blade on on Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores By default the name of a discovered LAN switch will be set to its system name or to its IP address if the system name could not be detected hyphens or periods 39 SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this LAN switch Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens 3 Click OK The registered LAN switch will be displayed in the net
92. 299 Registration and management of multiple VM management software VMware vCenter Server are possible 7 3 When using Blade Servers This section explains how to register resources when using blade servers When using blade servers use the following procedure to register resources Register Chassis Register blade servers Register LAN switch blades Configure VLANs on LAN switch blades 7 3 1 Registering Chassis This section explains how to register a chassis Registering chassis makes it possible to use the optional power monitoring settings When collecting power data perform the power data collection settings according to 9 6 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings For details on devices supporting power monitoring refer to 2 5 Hardware Environment in the Design Guide VE By registering a chassis every server blade mounted in the chassis will be automatically detected and displayed as an unregistered server in the server resource tree Register these managed servers individually For details on registering servers to manage refer to 7 3 2 Registering Blade Servers Use the following procedure to register a chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register Chassis from the popup menu The Register Chassis dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address that was set on
93. 5 1 Registering Chassis For PRIMEQUEST Servers eee e HE HERE EUSE En E OR eee bb ere E EC esee q5 2 Registers PRIMEQUES T Setvers ine roreeteitta cese ibd E rii rt C dee E er nera di CO ENEA O Ehio Tao WER sine PARC Enterprise SOLUBE sorores aget mn REO OU ete D ACT etu OR EB EUR HE t RO e deii 7 6 1 Registering SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Servers 76 2 Registermg SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series SODVETS iae recette caet retorno be d i pec na eee PE Ee dein 7 4 Resinte Power Monnborie DeSIQSE 5raesa ea eret EP E tr nre Rae eae DRESD ge Ee RR ERR I tee IU 8 Remstenms Admin LAN Subtets 2 2 remanere HE ra P EHE EH PUSH ERE EEUU EHE E E SESTE MEOE A E NESEN T9 Resntenns ETERNUS SE Storage GUB inerti rtr esterne ro Rr vesssaxdceasess vacdeeseenesesansds DE EES censeo EXE EEAS ERR Re EC ENER Chapter 8 Changing Admin Server SettingS cecccessesscceescecseceeseeeseceeseeceaeeeneeesaaeeeeneaeecaaeseanecsaesaeeseeeeeseeseaneeneeseaaeeneeteaes 55 a GS pane IPS hu MEE 55 8 2 Change Port NUBDGES i d tc iie E cepe re S SNEEN KEINEN OATS E NEA A OS TEKEE ONAE ie PUE TRE HESSE REPRE E EO HERE 59 8 3 Changing the Maximum Number of System Image VersjOlWB 1 erem rte teer titre ers eee i EEE 4 Changing the Maximum Number ef Cloning Image Versions 1 aeree there tenet rtt eret Cerere terea ed 8 5 Changing the Image Folder Location esses 8 6 Changing the Password for
94. 9092099909909990900000090999909909099090000009090909909009090090000090900909999990999000000009990999099900000090999999 Restart the managed server In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed z67 5 Change Admin LAN IP address 6 Click OK The admin IP address of the managed server is changed G amp Note CC It is not possible to change IP address settings of a managed server primary server with a spare server configured to a different subnet from the spare server 9 1 4 Changing SNMP Communities This section explains how to change SNMP community settings For blade servers PRIMEQUEST servers or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Use the following procedure to change SNMP community used by chassis and managed servers 1 Change the SNMP community set on the management blade management board or XSCF The new SNMP community should have Read Write permission For details on changing SNMP communities refer to the manual of the management blade management board or XSCF Change the SNMP community set on the managed server Use the same name for the SNMP community of the managed server on the management blade the management board and the XSCF Follow the instructions in the ServerView Agents manual to change the SNMP community used by a man
95. 9099990999909909090099200009099 Interface Entries without Redundancy The following table explains how to define each interface entry Keywords for interface entries should be appended with a number between 0 and 99 amp Note The number appended to each entry s keyword should start with 0 and increase incrementally Table 17 4 Interface Entry Settings without Redundanc Specify the interface name as displayed by the operating system Example Windows Interface name IF NAME Interface name Local area connection 2 Linux eth X where Xis an integer equal to or greater than 0 IP address in IP address IF IPAD XXX XXX XXX XXX format Subnet mask in Subnet mask IF MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX format Note As Windows allows interface names to be changed ensure that the names defined here match those displayed in Windows Interface entries with redundancy Linux The following table explains how to define each interface entry Keywords for interface entries should be appended with a number between 0 and 99 This setting uses the NIC switching mode Physical IP address takeover function of the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services product which requires a virtual interface set with its own IP address Within a same node entry it is possible to define interface entries both with and without redundancy settings as long as interface names differ amp Note The number appended to each entry s keyword includ
96. 9999099099090900000009099999 This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers Whenaserver blade is registered Resource Orchestrator does not check the actual slot position or whether it has been installed properly When registering multi slot servers enter only the master slot number server name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character on and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens If enclosed by parentheses this server will be seen as being in a switched over state and this line will be ignored when importing the system definition file amp Note Server names should be unique between all servers Names are not case sensitive ip address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources mac address Enter the MAC address of the admin LAN network interface NICI Index1 on Enter a string delimited by hyphens or colons XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXJX XX XX XX Xx second mac address Enter the MAC address of the network interface used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy The second network interface Index 2 should be used 197 on Enter a string delimited by hyphens G a
97. A 6 Chapter 4 License Setup ebsre nl ficuc M ET 7 Chapter 5 Managing User FOCUS so 8 Chapter 6 Blade VIC W m 10 Rte TOI A 10 pA M ilm 11 0 3 Resource Status MIB OPE rere pere br d vec iride eee ee it tate a RE Reb Hed bed ee tes ov eaae diea 11 OB NEC CI Pu M M N 12 ves te GUT Oa jj EE 12 CA Im CIT 13 52d DRC LIS ERR entes iiierdea tren e e tete e reti ette t b d idet ai m bano 13 osa VNTOUESE ANE sistere nim eee ditti e E o Pod staves rdi RE Oa 16 6 34 Resource dB ri c 18 Ural 29700 M M 18 t Serie Bade nennen esee iot mtonienenmea diadema etinm bdo aiia deis 18 SI MA WIE CWS T 20 S uUi mui iEn C 1 NEP 21 6 5 1 Listing and Editing pf Labels and Comments 2 nn eie eid eden eee iren pO ete e bed 22 6 5 2 Editing Contacts 6 5 3 Changing Passwords Chapter 7 Registering ResOUrces sssessissesssseeseeeeeseenee nnnm enne nns enn nets ennt enter etre setnnet
98. AN switch is deleted from the network resource tree 11 5 Deleting VM Management Software This section explains how to delete VM management software Use the following procedure to delete VM management software 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target management software is deleted 11 6 Clearing the Power Monitoring Environment This section explains how to clear the power monitoring environment Clearing the power monitoring environment is done by deleting power monitoring targets For details on how to release collection settings refer to 9 6 2 Canceling Collection Settings for Power Monitoring Environments 11 6 1 Deleting Power Monitoring Devices This section explains how to delete power monitoring devices 88 Use the following procedure to delete power monitoring devices 1 In the ROR console power monitoring devices tree right click the target power monitoring device and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target power monitoring devices are deleted from the tree view 11 7 Deleting Admin LAN Subnets This section explains how to delete admin LAN subnets Use the following procedure to delete an admin LAN subnet 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Admin LAN Subnet
99. Apply Collection of environmental data is canceled 9 6 3 Changing Power Monitoring Devices This section explains how to change power monitoring device settings The following settings can be changed Device name Admin LAN IP address SNMP community name Voltage Comments Complete setting modifications on the actual power monitoring device before performing this procedure Use the following procedure to change power monitoring device settings 1 From the ROR console right click the power monitoring device tree then select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Power Monitoring Device dialog is displayed 2 Make changes to the values as needed 3 Click OK The power monitoring device settings will be changed with the entered information 9 7 Changing Monitoring Information Settings This section explains how to change and cancel monitoring information settings 9 7 1 Changing Monitoring Information Settings This section explains how to change monitoring information settings The following settings can be changed Enabling or disabling of ping monitoring Time out Recovery method Number of reboots Use the following procedure to change settings 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target physical OS and the VM hosts and select Modify Monitoring Settings from the popup menu The Configuring monitoring settings dialog is displayed 79 2
100. Apply Admin LAN NIC settings checkbox is selected Select the NICs used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy For the following cases select the Disable MAC address 2 When not using the HBA address rename setup service 30 When not performing admin LAN redundancy amp Note For details about the network interface s used on the admin LAN refer to 7 1 Network Configuration in the Design Guide VE If an incorrect network interface is used Resource Orchestrator will not be able to detect the correct admin LAN IP address from the operating system running on the target server An admin LAN IP address is required even when registering a spare server Enter an IP address that does not conflict with the IP address of any other managed server on the admin LAN When registering a newly mounted PRIMERGY BX900 server as recognition of this server s admin LAN MAC address will take time error message number 61142 may be displayed In this case after registration has been canceled right click the chassis on the server resource tree and select Update from the popup menu to request an update of hardware properties This will update the MAC address to the correct value This may also take a few minutes to obtain hardware information and update internal properties Confirm that the correct MAC address is displayed correctly before registering the server again For details on the appropriate corrective act
101. B number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers XSB The partition eXtended System Board XSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers A 6 2 Server Attributes General Area Physical server name The name used to identify a server is displayed 170 Model name The model name of the server is displayed When the server has been registered as a managed server and powered on the server model name obtained from ServerView Operations Manager is displayed For other servers no model name is displayed Product name The product name of the server is displayed For PRIMERGY BX servers the product name obtained from the management blade is displayed For other servers the model name is displayed Status Server status is displayed Slot A slot number representing the mounted location is displayed Displayed only for PRIMERGY BX servers Partition ID The partition number is displayed Displayed only when a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected Maintenance Mode The operational status of the server is displayed One of the following is displayed active maintenance Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected LED status The illumination status of the maintenance LED is displayed Displayed only for PRIMERGY BX servers Admin LAN MAC address 1 The MAC address of the NIC
102. BUILTIN Administrators F NT SERVICE DHCPServer F RETURN 10 Add the DHCP Server to Services and Applications for the manager a e f Right click Services and Applications RC manager and select Add a resource Other Resources 1 Add a DHCP Service from the displayed menu A New DHCP Service will be created in the DHCP Service in Summary of RC manager Right click the New DHCP Service and select Properties from the popup menu The New DHCP Service Properties window will be displayed Change the Resource Name on the General tab and set the paths given in the following table Database path Drive_name Pujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp Monitoring file path Drive_name Fujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp Backup path Drive_name Fujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp backup After making the settings click lt Apply gt From here the explanation is made assuming that Resource Name was set as DHCP Server On the Resource of the Dependencies tab select the following name and select AND from AND OR Shared Disks Network Name Admin LAN IP Address Click Apply Click OK 11 Configure the registry replication settings from the following Services and Applications of the manager Following the table in step 2 set replication of the registry of the resource Perform the following procedure for each resource a Right click the target resource on Other Resources on the Summary of RC
103. Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target chassis is deleted from the server resource tree amp Note 6060200200909092990900000906099099090000090099009090000000909909000009099099000000909909090990000090909090990990900900090929990909000009990000009999 If server blades and partitions within the chassis were already registered delete these server blades and partitions before deleting the chassis If LAN switches have been registered delete all LAN switches before deleting the chassis 11 2 Deleting Managed Servers This section explains how to delete managed servers Use the following procedure to delete managed servers 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or the physical OS or the VM host on the server and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed If a VM host is running on the server to be deleted any VM guests running on that host are also deleted from the server resource tree at the same time The VM guests to be deleted appear in the Delete Resource dialog so check that it is safe to delete them 2 Click OK Ifa physical OS or VM host exists on the target server and HBA address rename is set The server will be powered off and the target server will be unregistered when the resource is deleted Resource Orchestrator does not delete the host affinity settings of storage units or the zoning settings of Fibre Channel swi
104. Display 106 Scale E MrH COEA 106 133 3 Agptecat Display of Network Link eie esito nee iet enis erbe tile E EFE SERE dhe SE ire N SAATE TENOREN 106 IE PIED CV lu m 107 Chapter Mo qr MEE 14 1 Server Power Control 14 2 Chassis Power Control Chapter 15 Conirol or VM ETHVIFORITRGEIS seiniin oret t nmt irn ra Rete need e t Eee db cadere EE Pu aaa aaia 15 1 Migration of VM Guests between Servers 15 2 VM Marmtenanee Wodeat VM BOSE indie recen re roe roO REPE EEERERG TO FORGOT DO DO ELTE EE ES HR Home Fodion MR m INI un VM Boro lee ii T 15 3 2 Misralimg to VM Home Posi nec eiit ocn erroe ret Ee EHE OO EE FE OEC te E ERE 12 222 Ceant VM Home D OSIBOR hsosee n orien sero ettet trm ct terr ee nee tdi e e ra EE E RE RE uet I hein SORES oc cece covesvesven Chapter 16 Backup and FIBGIDIU ausi se esate eevee ecteesieesstee iets panni ainan isea in t aaia astiaan 115 KERo a o E E E E a sss savsausceessgesss E E sipetaseaesaaeee 115 Oa O NE a E E E E E A 16 3 Restore 16 4 Viewing 16 5 Deleting Chapter 17 Cloning Physical Serer ci 5 eie detiene etre te aute a aaea cian an aaea Ea iE ened eens 122 DFA RENE EA EE EE E E E S S EE 17 2 Collecting 17 3 Deploying Eu ET a L AE A E E A E T
105. ETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename and the following model PRIMERGY BX960 S1 Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Check whether the DHCP client is enabled on the managed server to collect the cloning image from Cloning images with the same name can be saved up until the maximum number of image versions When collecting a new cloning image when the maximum number of image versions has already been reached select the cloning image to delete The maximum number of image versions is three by default This setting can be changed by following the instructions given in 8 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions When deploying cloning images the destination server temporarily starts up with its hostname set to either the physical server name or the source server s hostname 124 If the same server names are detected on the same network a network duplication error will occur Some programs may experience problems when started with a different hostname If such programs have been installed configure their services not to start automatically This has to be configured before
106. G amp Note This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers admin_lan_nic_redundancy Enter one of the following When using the NIC specified in the admin_lan2_nic_number as the backup for admin LAN redundancy ON When not using the NIC specified in the admin_lan2_nic_number as the backup for admin LAN redundancy OFF SPARC Data Section Name Enter SPARC as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server_name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 199 ip address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods mgmt snmp community name Enter the name of a SNMP community with read permission configured on this server s remote management controller ILOM XSCF Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens mgmt ip address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller ILOM XSCF Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods amp Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources eccccc25 900060602000000920992909999990900000909099909909909209090000909099090999909909
107. II character codes 0x20 0x21 or 0x23 to Ox7e and no double quotations Passwords entered in this field are seen as plain text passwords privileged_passwd_enc Enter one of the following If privileged_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted product_name Enter the model of the LAN switch blade Note that if a hyphen is entered it is treated as BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 One of the following models can be entered PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 8 2 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 195 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 PRIMERGY BX600 GbE Switch 16 2x10Gb PRIMERGY BX600 GbE Switch 16x1Gb Cisco Catalyst Blade Switch 3040 connection_type Enter the connection method to use for the LAN switch blade If you configure ssh for a LAN switch blade which does not support SSH or specify a character string other than ssh the configuration is regarded as telnet For telnet telnet For SSH ssh VLAN Data for LAN Switch Blades Section Name Enter LanSwitchNet as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis name in the Chassis section port no Enter the port number of an external LAN switch blade port Enter numeric characters The port number that c
108. IOM amp Note 900600009000909000009090999090990000909090990990090000990990990909090000909999909000090909090900000909090990990920000090990909000090999099000009999 For items that there is no content to display the details for a hyphen is displayed Selecting a blade server displays the following chassis image in the Resource Details tab This image shows the slot positions of all server blades installed in the chassis 168 Figure A 5 Chassis 12345678910 The resource images shown in the above chassis image are explained in the table below Table A 19 Meaning of the Resources Shown in the Chassis Image a In Server blade selected within the chassis image Server blade that has not been registered yet Empty slot Attributes of Displayed Resources The Resource Details tab displays different attributes for each resource as described below A 6 1 Chassis Attributes General Area Chassis name The name used to identify a chassis is displayed Model name The model name of the chassis is displayed Admin LAN IP address The chassis admin IP address is displayed Status The status of the chassis is displayed Server blades The number of server blades mounted in the chassis is displayed Displayed only when the chassis of a blade server is selected Partition count The number of mounted partitions is displayed Displayed only when the chassis of a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M800
109. M host administrator authority Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host Boot option Only set this when the targets of operations are PRIMEQUEST servers Specify the boot option configured from BIOS when installing the OS For UEFI Select UEFI For Legacy Boot Select Legacy boot By default UEFI is selected These settings can be changed after server registration For details on how to modify these settings refer to 9 1 10 Changing Boot Options Apply Admin LAN NIC settings checkbox The checkbox is displayed only for blade servers PRIMERGY BX servers When not changing the Admin LAN NIC settings NICI Index1 and NIC2 Index2 are used without changing the NICs used for the admin LAN the HBA address rename setup service or for redundancy of the admin LAN When changing the Admin LAN NIC settings NICI Index1 and NIC2 Index2 are used as the NICs for the admin LAN the HBA address rename setup service and redundancy of the admin LAN Select the NICs to use from Admin LAN MAC address1 and Admin LAN MAC address2 Admin LAN MAC address 1 Displayed when the Apply Admin LAN NIC settings checkbox is selected Select the NIC to use for the admin LAN The IP address allocated to the selected NIC is displayed in Admin LAN IP address When an IP address is not allocated specify the admin LAN IP address of the server to register Admin LAN MAC address 2 Displayed when the
110. N ID Enter the tagged VLAN ID s to assign to the LAN switch blade port that is connected to the network interface selected in step 2 Multiple VLAN IDs can be entered by separating them with commas 4 Click OK Note that the VLAN settings are not applied onto the LAN switch blade at this stage To configure VLANs for multiple network interfaces repeat steps 2 to 4 5 Confirm the configuration set in the Network Settings dialog 6 Click OK VLAN settings are applied to the related LAN switch blade Note 606060600200900090900000909090840000090909090900000090909209090900009090909090900090009009090000000909009090000009099099090000000920900000000299 The VLAN configuration of a registered LAN switch blade should be set from the ROR console instead of the LAN switch s own Web based and command based interfaces If the Port VLAN ID field is left blank and a value is entered for Tagged VLAN ID in the VLAN Configuration dialog the tagged LAN only will be enabled To enable a port VLAN enter a value for Port VLAN ID When only a tagged VLAN is configured the value for the port VLAN is not displayed on the ROR console even if it has been configured on the switch For the devices for which port VLANs cannot be deleted it is necessary to limit the frames that let ports pass through to the tagged frames only If the port VLAN ID is unspecified or 1 a tagged VLAN ID cannot be set to 1 7 3 7 HBA address rename Settings
111. OR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the import process The Cancel button interrupts the import process after completing the current process Note that the processing performed up to the error point is effective in the system Point 00606060062000920992090909000000009090999909006000000009009090090909090900000000909009909909909000000000099909000000000009099299 The SpareServer ServerAgent and ServerVMHost sections must meet the conditions below when performing pre configuration a Spare server section SpareServer In cases where the specified spare server has no operating system installed The physical server which is defined as a spare server must not be defined in ServerWWNN ServerAgent or Server VMHost sections When configuring a server using I O virtualization as a spare server The server must meet one of the following conditions HBA address rename information must already be configured on the physical server in which a spare server is defined A VIOM server profile must already be configured on the physical server in which a spare server is defined In cases where the specified spare server is a VM host The physical server which is defined as a spare server must already be registered for the Resource Orchestrator agent When configuring a server with WWN information set using storage affinity switchover as a spare server WWN information m
112. Port Link Aggregation Select Tagged from the VLAN type of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 5 Click OK The VLAN ID is changed Changing VLAN Types This section explains how to change the types of VLAN port or tagged VLAN set on the external ports of a LAN switch Use the following procedure to change VLAN types 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Change the VLAN type Untagged or Tagged of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN type is changed Deleting VLAN IDs This section explains how to delete VLAN IDs Deleting VLAN IDs from LAN switch blades Use the following procedure to delete VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed 3 Click Delete The VLAN ID is deleted 26 Deleting VLAN IDs from LAN switch ports Use the following procedur
113. RD With KMS Manual Settings ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params kmscheck MANUAL cmd remotescript 1 params kmsname fujitsu activation com cmd remotescript 1 params kmsport 497 1 cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password PASSWORD With MAK ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params makkey 11111 22222 33333 44444 55555 cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password PASSWORD If the Administrator password has been changed execute the following command The password specified in the cmd remotescript 1 params password parameter of the definition file is changed to the encrypted string and the line 126 encrypted yes is added to indicate that the password is encrypted For details refer to 5 6 rcxadm deployctl in the Reference Guide Command VE gt Installation foldeNAgenti biniexadm deployctl passwd encrypt RETURN With MAK Already Encrypted Password ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params makkey 11111 22222 33333 44444 55555 cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password xyz123456 encrypted yes Collecting Cloning Images Use the following procedure to collect cloning images 1 Place the target server into maintenance mode a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the desired server or its phys
114. ROR SVROR etc dhcpd conf 1 etc dhcpd conf Mount_destination_of_shared_disk Fujitsu ROR S VROR etc dhcp dhcpd conf 2 etc dhcp dhcpd conf Mount_destination_of_shared_disk Fujitsu ROR S VROR Vvar lib dhcpd var lib dhcpd When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 2 When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Change the settings of the DHCP service Primary node Change the following files when registering the admin LAN subnet and set the takeover logical IP address after the change to the DHCP server File name Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 etc dhcpd conf Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 etc dhcp dhcpd conf Add the following lines and set the takeover logical IP address option dhcp server identifier takeover logical IP address Example When the takeover logical IP address is 192 168 4 100 DHCP Server Configuration file see usr share doc dhcp dhcpd conf sample ddns update style none option vendor class identifier PXEClient option dhcp server identifier 192 168 4 100 This line is added subnet 192 168 4 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 Unmount the shared disk Primary node Unmount the shared disk for managers from the primary node Mount the shared disk Secondary node Mount the shared disk for managers on the secondary node Back up files and configure symbolic links for the shared disk Secondary node a Perform step b of step 4 and back up the files on the local disk b Perform step 5
115. ROR console and BladeViewer Furthermore the Phishing Filter may show a warning on the status bar These warnings are referring to the same self signed certificate issue discussed in the previous bullet It is safe to continue with the current browser settings To stop displaying the security certificate warning screen and the certificate error icon create a certificate associated with the IP address or hostname of the admin server and add it to the Web browser A login window with a URL differing from the address bar s URL in which the IP address or host name FQDN may be displayed depending on the OS configuration There are no problems with using the displayed window Refer to Appendix B HTTPS Communication in the Design Guide VE for details Opening the ROR Console This section explains how to access the ROR console Add the URL of the ROR console to the Trusted sites of the browser Start a Web browser from an admin client and specify the URL of the ROR console for connection If the port number was changed specify the new port number When Single Sign On has been configured the login window for Single Sign On will be displayed However when Single Sign On authentication has already been performed the ROR console can be started without displaying the login window When Single Sign On is not configured the login window for Resource Orchestrator will be displayed Refer to Chapter 10 Installing and Defining Single Sign On
116. ROR console menu select Tools Topology Detect physical links The Detect Physical Links dialog is displayed 97 b Click OK Gj Note 606060600000909090000009090909000000909099090900000900909900909000009090909090000090900909000000090090090900000099099090900000092090900006000299 If no LAN switch blades have been registered only network links between external LAN switches will be displayed If only one external switch is registered no network links will be displayed at all If anon supported LAN switch is registered network links may not be properly displayed for that switch The Network Map cannot display network links between BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 and the following LAN switch blades PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 Network links between two supported LAN switches may not be displayed properly if an unregistered or un supported LAN switch is placed between them p Example ececococsoooocoocooooooooooooooooooooocoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo In such a case the following inconsistencies may be displayed A LAN switch port maybe seen as being connected to multiple switches multiple links are shown attached to that switch port 13 3 Screen Layout This section describes the Network Map s layout The main part of the Network Map is the network view 13 3 1 Network Map Layout This section descri
117. Resource tab in Resource Orchestrator Resource Orchestrator provides two different GUIs on the Resource tab the default window and BladeViewer Choosing an appropriate GUI depends on the administrator s authority level or the kind of operations to be performed ROR console The ROR console gives access to all functions of Resource Orchestrator BladeViewer BladeViewer offers a simplified lifelike representation of blade servers and their statuses While this enables intuitive operation it does not include the tree based navigation or detailed menus available in the Resource tab of the ROR console BladeViewer makes it easier to monitor blade servers visualize their hosted applications and perform power operations This makes BladeViewer suitable for administrators who only need to monitor blades and perform basic operations To switch the view of the Resource tab from the default window to BladeViewer click lt BladeViewer gt gt gt To switch the view of the Resource tab from BladeViewer to the default window click lt Advanced gt gt gt A Information All descriptions about the user interface other than those in Chapter 6 BladeViewer apply to the default window For details on the Resource tab of the ROR console refer to Appendix A User Interface For details on Blade Viewer refer to Chapter 6 Blade Viewer This explains the Blade Viewer screen and the functions that it provides When logging in for t
118. S Server View FUJITSU ServerView Resource Orchestrator Virtual Edition V3 1 0 User s Guide Windows Linux J2X1 7606 03ENZO 00 October 2012 Preface Resource Orchestrator Documentation Road Map The documentation road map for Resource Orchestrator is as shown below Resource Orchestrator Documentation Road Map Design Guide VE l Setup Guide VE l Operation Guide VE User s Guide VE Reference Guide Command VE Messages Troubleshooting For information about the documents for Resource Orchestrator refer to Chapter 1 Documentation Road Map in the Design Guide VE Purpose This manual provides an outline of the operation method of the ROR console provided by ServerView Resource Orchestrator hereinafter Resource Orchestrator Target Readers This manual is written for people who will install Resource Orchestrator When setting up systems it is assumed that readers have the basic knowledge required to configure the servers storage and network devices to be installed Organization This manual is composed as follows Chapter 1 Login and Logout Explains how to log in and out of the ROR console Chapter 2 Home Explains the ROR Console Home window display Chapter 3 Resource Management Overview Provides an overview of the two views available in Resource Orchestrator Chapter 4 License Setup and Confirmation Explains license setup Chapter 5 Managing User Accounts Explains how to register modify
119. W201 or PY SWB102 PG SW111 Logical port number of the LAG port channel Member port Link status The physical port names and the link status up or down of the physical ports is displayed for the ports in the link aggregation VLAN VLAN ID A list of VLAN IDs set in the selected LAN switch is displayed 178 Untagged Port s A list of ports set with a port VLAN ID is displayed The logical port for link aggregation is only displayed for LAN switch blades Tagged Port s A list of ports set with tagged VLAN ID s is displayed The logical port for link aggregation is only displayed for LAN switch blades Note The following LAN switch blades are included PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 Network links The following information is only displayed for LAN switch blades Resource Name left side The name of the selected network device is displayed I F left side The port name of the network device is displayed I F right side The interface name of the resource connected to the network device is displayed Resource Name right side The name of the resource connected to the network device is displayed Information about connections with network devices is not displayed A 6 5 Power Monitoring Devices PDU or UPS Attributes General Area Device name The name used to identify a PDU or UPS is displayed Admin
120. When a physical OS and VM host are running on this server the admin LAN IP address may be obtained automatically After cancelling registration of the server right click the chassis on the server resource tree and select Update from the popup menu to request an update of hardware properties If the IP address is not shown after going through the above procedure set it by manually entering the IP address and registering the server IP addresses cannot be collected automatically when the server is a SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server After entering the IP addresses manually register the servers 29 Server OS category This option is displayed if the target server runs a physical OS or VM host Select the appropriate server OS category Physical OS or VM host Selecting VM Host activates the user ID and password input fields Those refer to the user name and password entered during installation of this VM host Select the server OS category depending on whether the relevant server is used on a physical OS or a VM host Fora Physical OS Select Windows Linux or Solaris only SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Fora VM Host Select VM Host and enter the VM host login account information This login account information will be used by Resource Orchestrator to control and communicate with the registered VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has V
121. a When hub to hub monitoring is to be performed specify two monitored destinations Hub to hub monitoring will not be performed if only one destination is specified In this case the value specified in POL HUBS whether to perform hub to hub monitoring will not be referenced Yis an integer between 0 and 255 Specify a name that is different from the virtual interface name Do not set anything unless standby patrolling is set Specify ON to enable hub to hub monitoring or OFF otherwise This setting is valid only if two monitoring destinations are specified If only one monitoring destination is specified this setting is disabled set to OFF 2 Enable the Network Parameter Auto Configuration Function Enable the network parameter auto configuration function by executing the following command Execute this command from a managed server Windows gt Installation_folde Agent bin rcxadm lanctl enable lt RETURN gt Linux opt FJSVrcexat bin rexadm lanctl enable lt RETURN gt For details on the command refer to 5 9 rcxadm lanctl in the Reference Guide Command VE 17 6 1 Operation Checks and Preparations Use the following procedure to actually apply the definition file s settings on the reference server and prepare a cloning image to be used for further server deployments The definition file s settings applied from the definition file should be validated before image collection by checking
122. advance according to the procedure described in 7 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles To register blade servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers refer to 7 4 When using Rack Mount and Tower Servers Figure 7 1 Status Transition Diagram for Managed Servers Registered Without a registered agent Registering Managed WZ Deleting Managed Server x2 Registering Agents Registering Managed Server Deleting chassis Automatic Agent registration A i A i i Deleting Managed Server Server status Functions that can be used with that server status C The target resource is not displayed in the resource tree SL Use the following procedure to register blade servers 28 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click an unregistered server blade or partition in the target chassis and select Register Server from the popup menu The Register Server dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Physical Server Name Enter a name to assign to this physical server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens C Register agent checkbox Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Without Agent Registration Automatic registration of agents is not performed after server registration After registering servers register agents as required
123. age to be restored c Click OK Restoration of the system image is started The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console When Cancel is clicked in the Recent Operations area the confirmation dialog to quit the process is displayed To restore a system image from the Image List tab a In the ROR console select the Image List tab The System Image List is displayed b Right click the system image to be restored and select Restore from the popup menu The Restore dialog is displayed c Click OK Restoration of the system image is started The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console When Cancel is clicked in the Recent Operations area the confirmation dialog to quit the process is displayed When restoring a VM host be sure to also restore the VM guest backups that correspond to the restored VM host backup version For details on restoring VM guests refer to the server virtualization software manual 3 Release the target server from maintenance mode before resuming its applications a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu The Release Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed 119 b Click OK The target server is released from maintenance mode If the target VM host is in a high availability configur
124. aged server The new SNMP community should have Read Write permission In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed Change SNMP Community Click OK The SNMP community is changed For Rack Mount and Tower Servers Use the following procedure to change the SNMP community used by PRIMERGY servers For servers other than PRIMERGY servers changing SNMP communities does not require any configuration change in Resource Orchestrator 1 Change the SNMP community set on the managed server Follow the instructions in the ServerView Agents manual to change the SNMP community used by a managed server In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed Change SNMP Community Click lt OK gt The SNMP community is changed For SPARC Enterprise Servers Use the following procedure to change SNMP community used by the Remote Management Controller 1 Change the SNMP community set on the remote management controller XSCF For details on changing SNMP communities refer to the XSCF manuals 68 2 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu T
125. ages is displayed under the cloning image list Use this list to manage the cloning images used by Resource Orchestrator 134 Figure 17 1 Cloning Image List Cloning Image List Y lt lt lt 1 1 gt gt gt Cloning Image Name Version Collection Date os Comments bx600_1_clone 1 2010 05 07 11 34 00 RedHat Linux For details on the Cloning Image List refer to A 8 Image List Tab 17 5 Deleting This section explains how to delete a cloning image Use the following procedure to delete cloning images 1 In the ROR console select the Image List tab A list of cloning images is displayed under the cloning image list 2 In this list right click the name of the cloning image to delete and select Delete from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click lt OK gt The selected cloning image is deleted G amp G Note While the cloning image is being deleted no operations can be performed on other versions of the same cloning image images that share the same image name Cy 17 6 Network Parameter Auto Configuration for Cloning Images This section explains the network parameter auto configuration function for cloning images Defining public LAN network parameters for each managed server before collecting cloning images enables automatic configuration of the cloned servers public LAN network interfaces when later deploying those cloning images This speeds up the deployment of multiple
126. all Red Hat based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the United States and other countries Spectrum is a trademark or registered trademark of Computer Associates International Inc and or its subsidiaries SUSE is a registered trademark of SUSE LINUX AG a Novell business VMware the VMware boxes logo and design Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions ServerView and Systemwalker are registered trademarks of FUJITSU LIMITED All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Notices The contents of this manual shall not be reproduced without express written permission from FUJITSU LIMITED The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice Month Y l onu Sa ested Manual Code Edition N ber 2011 First ovember 2011 First 7351 606 01ENZO 00 Edition December 2011 1 1 J2X1 7606 01ENZO 01 December 2011 1 2 J2X1 7606 01ENZ0 02 tober 2012 Third Octoper 2012 dip 12X1 7606 03ENZ0 00 Edition Copyright FUJITSU LIMITED 2010 2012 Ix Contents Chapier EI and MONE LL EELEPILIET 1 WWE Te n cr 4 2 1 Editingihe Home UL Lr M 4 Chapter 3 Resource Management Overview essssesssseeseseenetnnetne enne te cren Nenu rea Sanaa NENE
127. an be specified is different depending on the model type For details refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade to be used vlan id optional Enter the VLAN ID and tag type T for tagged or U for untagged to be assigned to the specified LAN switch blade port Enter a VLAN ID followed by tag types To specify multiple VLAN IDs separate each set of VLAN settings using semicolons Both tagged T and untagged U VLAN IDs can be used together but only one untagged U type is allowed jai Example 10 U 10 U 20 T 30 T 10 T 20 T Note If a hyphen is entered VLAN settings will not be performed This section will be ignored for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 196 Server Management Information Section Name Enter Server as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis name in the Chassis section 0 06060606000029209290909090000000009090990909209000000009090902909909000000000009090990990909099090000000009920909200000000090929299 This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers slot no Enter the slot number where the server blade is installed Enter a number between 1 and 18 amp Note 0 0600000909092292990909909099000009090909990909090000000009090909090020909009000000900909999099090909909900000009
128. anagement Board The PRIMEQUEST system management unit Used for gathering information such as failure notification power control etc from chassis manager The section program of Resource Orchestrator that operates on admin servers It manages and controls resources registered with Resource Orchestrator virtual switch A function provided by server virtualization software to manage networks of VM guests as virtual LAN switches The relationships between the virtual NICs of VM guests and the NICs of the physical servers used to operate VM hosts can be managed using operations similar to those of the wiring of normal LAN switches VLAN Virtual LAN A splitting function which enables the creation of virtual LANs seen as differing logically by software by grouping ports on a LAN switch Using a Virtual LAN network configuration can be performed freely without the need for modification of the physical network configuration VLAN ID A number between 1 and 4 095 used to identify VLANs Null values are reserved for priority tagged frames and 4 096 FFF in hexadecimal is reserved for mounting 217 VM Virtual Machine A virtual computer that operates on a VM host VM guest A virtual server that operates on a VM host or an OS that is operated on a virtual machine VM Home Position The VM host that is home to VM guests VM host A server on which server virtualization software is operated or the server virtuali
129. and configure symbolic links for the shared disk Unmount the shared disk Secondary node Unmount the shared disk for managers from the secondary node 53 11 Start cluster applications Use the cluster system s operation management view Cluster Admin and start the manager cluster service cluster application 12 Register the admin LAN subnet 7 9 Registering ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser This section explains how to register ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Registering ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser enables server switchover integrated with Fibre Channel switch zoning using ESC and host affinity reconfiguration on storage devices This operation is necessary when using server switchover storage affinity switchover method functions on managed servers for Solaris in SAN boot environments ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser can be registered using the rexadm storagemgr register command For details on the rcxadm storagemgr register command refer to 5 13 rcxadm storagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE 54 Chapter 8 Changing Admin Server Settings This chapter explains how to change the settings for the admin server 8 1 Changing Admin IP Addresses Use the following procedure to change the IP address used on the admin LAN by the admin server 1 2 Log on to the admin server with OS administrative privileges Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide
130. aneously on the cloning images with the same name Ifacloning image is deployed to a system with a larger disk capacity than the disk space required for the cloning image any excessive disk space becomes unused disk space This unused disk space can be used for other purposes Destination servers are rebooted several times during cloning image deployment Make sure that deployment has completed before restarting operations and making further settings The number of reboots during deployment increases when using the HBA address rename function Communication errors between the admin and destination servers resulting in an image deployment failure or an unknown status on the destination server may be caused by improper use of the network parameter auto configuration function described in 17 6 Network Parameter Auto Configuration for Cloning Images Examples of improper use are given below Auto configuration settings were made for the admin LAN Auto configuration settings were made for the public LAN using IP addresses contained within the admin LAN subnet range Log in to the destination servers on which errors occurred and check for the presence of such settings in the definition file for the network parameter auto configuration function If incorrect settings were made perform the following operations to fix communication errors Fix network settings on destination servers If the source and destination servers are the sa
131. applications are running on each server blade and identify the applications affected by a server failure Clicking on a label displays the comment defined for the related resource Registering troubleshooting and recovery procedures beforehand can speed up the recovery of affected applications when a problem occurs 10 Display of contact information BladeViewer allows users to define technical support contact information for their entire IT system This contact information can be shown by clicking on the Contact icon Registering contact details of technical support staff beforehand can help streamline recovery procedures when problems occur 6 2 Screen Layout This section explains how the BladeViewer screen is organized The BladeViewer screen consists of a status panel a chassis panel and a blade panel Figure 6 2 BladeViewer Screen Layout Chassis panel Blade panel Status panel This panel displays a summary of resources statuses Chassis panel This panel displays the statuses of each registered chassis Blade panel This panel displays the status of all resources mounted within the selected chassis A Information 00600000099209000000099909900000090909090000000909090990900000090999000000090900000000099209900000099909000000090909909090000099299 To switch from BladeViewer to the ROR console click lt Advanced gt gt gt which is displayed in the upper right of the BladeViewer screen Switch to the ROR console w
132. are displayed When connected to a PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blade operating in IBP mode IBP is displayed Tagged VLAN The tagged VLAN IDs set on the LAN switch ports connected to each network interface are displayed When connected to a PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blade operating in IBP mode IBP is displayed Port Groups Area IBP NIC Index The mounted position index of each network interface on the server is displayed Group The names of the port groups set on the LAN switch ports connected to each network interface for LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode are displayed Only is displayed under the following conditions The corresponding LAN switch is not registered The corresponding LAN switch is not operating in IBP mode The corresponding LAN switch port has not been assigned to a port group Monitoring Information Timeout sec The time out value in seconds for ping monitoring is displayed Recovery method The recovery performed when an error is detected is displayed Number of reboots The number of times reboot is performed during recovery is displayed WWN Settings Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests or servers other than SPARC Enterprise servers WWPN of port n n 1 8 The WWPN value of the port z is displayed Values set by users are reflected on WWPN Target CA WWPN The WWPN for the CA connected to the port n is displayed 176 Target CA Affinit
133. are displayed in System Image List and Cloning Image List System Image List Server Name The name used to identify a physical OS or VM host is displayed Version The latest version of the system image is displayed Backup Date The date and time of the most recent system image backup is displayed Comments Comments describing the system image are displayed Cloning Image List Area Cloning Image Name The name used to identify a cloning image is displayed Version The version of the cloning image is displayed 181 Collection Date The name used to identify a cloning image is displayed OS The name of the operating system stored in the cloning image is displayed Comments Comments describing the cloning image are displayed Right clicking a resource in the list displays a list of available operations in a popup menu Refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus for details on the operations available from popup menus Clicking a column heading in this list will change the color of the selected column and sort images in either ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to move forwards and backwards by single pages and to the first or last page A 9 Network Map Resource Orchestrator displays the following information Network configuration of physical and virtual servers including virtual switches and VM guests Statuses of network links between all resources VLAN configuratio
134. artitionModelServer MonitorSetting RCXCSV V3 4 and Later VIOManager RCXCSV V3 5 and Later SPARC SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series performs import export of a system configuration file CSV format by a section name SPARC The section name SPARCEnterprise only imports a system configuration file CSV format 6060600090990000009990990000000909099000000009090990900000909090990000000900909000000090090990000000909090900000009909000000029999 Comments The following lines are assumed to be comments and are skipped Lines that begin with the symbol p Example 0606060620009209000000990900000000990090900009009029099099090000909090900909090009090909090000090090290909000000099009090000999900600099 Development environment definition 060606062002092092090900000909099090000000990909000009009099099090000009099909000000909090900000009209209000000099000000090099000096 on Lines that consist of only blank spaces tab characters or linefeed code Lines that contain only commas Unrecognized resource definition Resource Definitions Create the resource definition using the following format Describe the same type of resource in the same section Resource Definition Format Section name Section Header Operation column Parameter parameter Section Name This describes the resource type Section Header This describes the parameter type unique to the resource amp Note Do
135. as described in 13 5 3 Aggregate Display of Network Links will show a warning status if only a subset of its links have an error status 13 5 3 Aggregate Display of Network Links When two resources are linked by two or more links those links are represented as one aggregated link please note that this appellation is not related with the Link Aggregation Protocol but only refers to the display representation of multiple links as one entity Aggregated links are shown as thick lines in the Network Map The following diagram shows an example of aggregate display 106 p Example TI FU JITSU SLOT 1 RC SLOT i Mgr FUJITSU 1 FUJITSU 7 a L SLOTH ANEALORORNARZONALAORAN SLOTH FUJITSU lan1 SSSR erie FUJITSU lan2 CIEAERERCACAEACAESCHECHICHECHER CHIC OH CHEHEHEHEHE A 19 18 Catalyst2950 Close details FUJITSU SLOT 1 RC SLOT L Mgr FUJITSLI 1 FUJITSU SLOT y SLOT H2 y FUJITSUHani F JITSU lan2 Catalyst2950 Note Selecting a displayed resource will focus display on that resource In such a focus mode all links that are not directly related to the selected resource will be shown in lighter colors 13 6 Display Filters This section explains how to use display filters 107 Resource descriptions The display filter area includes the following filters checkboxes Selecting or clearing a filter s checkbox will either show or hide the content assoc
136. ases Select Other Server Selecting this option activates the IP address field Enter the IP address of the server on which VM management software is installed By default Admin Server is selected IP address Enter the IP address of VM management software When specifying Admin Server for the location entry is not possible as the IP address of admin server remains displayed on Enter the IP address using periods Note When receiving SNMP traps from VM management software VMware vCenter Server the configured IP address and the SNMP trap source IP address of the VM management software VMware vCenter Server should be the same The SNMP trap source IP address is the IP address of the protocol with the highest priority of protocol binding When changing the SNMP trap source IP address change the order of protocol binding User ID Enter the user ID to use to control VM management software Enter up to 84 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to 0x7e 26 Password Enter the password for VM management software Enter up to 128 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to 0x7e 3 Click OK VM management software is registered with the entered information A Information 606060620000092090000009099090990900009090990990900000090909099099090000090909099090900009099009909000000909099090990000000990909090000009099090000090
137. at R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack2 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack2 for EM64T SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack3 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 10 Service Pack3 for EM64T SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for EM64T SUSE R L
138. ation all VM guests stored on shared disks should be migrated to another VM host beforehand During restore because the target VM host will be automatically set to VM maintenance mode the VM host should be in a state that allows VM maintenance mode to be set After restoring the VM host migrate the VM guests back to their original VM host Refer to the server virtualization software manual and D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE for information on how to migrate VM guests and about the VM maintenance mode Even when the restore operation is canceled the target server cannot be returned to its previous status after the image is deployed When the managed server has the following configuration it may not be possible to perform backup correctly unless the following command is executed before performing backup In a SAN data environment using a built in disk boot and a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN Linux Manager slopt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos lt RETURN gt When using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met In a SAN boot environment using HBA address rename When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server manageme
139. ation on how to start the ROR Console The elements of the Home window are explained below Functions list The functions list displays the items that can be operated using ROR Console tabs Click the triangle icon next to the Function list to toggle Display Hide Information Information from the Special Administrator and Infrastructure Administrator is displayed 2 1 Editing the Home Messages This section explains how to edit the messages that are shown in the lower section of the home window of the ROR console Information can be edited from the ROR console using the following procedure 1 Click Edit on the upper right side of the table 2 The Edit Information window is displayed To add information click Add on the Edit Information window To perform other operations select information from the list and then click Move up Move down Edit or Delete Click Save to save the changes after operations have been completed Adding Information This section explains how to add information Perform the following procedure to add information a Click Add on the Edit Information window The Add entry dialog is displayed b Set the following items Schedule There is no specified format When not displaying the date leave this field blank Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters or symbols Commas cannot be used Messages Enter up to 250 alphanumeric characters or symbols c Click OK The entered infor
140. be performed so register agents after server registration when necessary Without Agent Registration Physical server name Remote management controller IP address User ID Password Association with server management software ServerView Enable Disable SNMP Community 35 Admin LAN IP address MAC address NIC1 SAN Boot Admin LAN Redundancy MAC address NIC2 Automatic registration of agents is not performed after server registration After registering servers register agents as required If registering agents register agents after checking the product name is displayed in the General Area of Resource Details tab Executing Update acquires the latest information With Agent Registration Physical server name Remote management controller IP address User ID Password Association with server management software ServerView Enable Disable SNMP Community Admin LAN IP address Admin LAN Redundancy MAC address NIC2 OS Type Agents are automatically registered after server registration is completed Physical Server Name Enter a name to assign to this physical server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens Remote management controller IP address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller User ID Enter the ID of a remote management controller user acco
141. ber between 1 and 12 vlan id optional Enter the VLAN ID and tag type T or U to be assigned to the LAN switch blade port connected to this server s network interface Enter a VLAN ID followed by tag types To specify multiple VLAN IDs separate each set of VLAN settings using semicolons Both tagged T and untagged U VLAN IDs can be used together but only one untagged U type is allowed p Example 10 U 10 U 20 T 30 T 10 T 20 T 0606060620600029209929090900000000909090990909090990000000900909020909090000000000909909990990909000000000099099090990900000000009999 Note If a hyphen is entered VLAN settings will not be performed Use the following NIC indexes to specify LAN expansion cards if any was mounted PRIMERGY BX600 Servers 7 8 PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 Servers 5to 12 This section will be ignored for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Server Data Section Name Enter SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelServer as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the chassis name in the SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis section partition no The number of a partition Enter a number between 0 and 23 server name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character
142. bes the Network Map s layout Network view Shows the statuses of registered resources and the network links between them Map selection area Provides buttons to select which map to display overall map or local map Scroll button Scrolls the network view into the selected direction up down left or right Reset button Resets the network view to its initial display Magnification slider Maximizes or minimizes the network view Automatic Updates checkbox To configure automatic updating of the network map check the checkbox Clearing the checkbox stops automatic updating of the network map Update button Update the network map to show the latest status 98 Display filter area Provides checkboxes to select which information to display in the network view Map navigation area Shows a zoomed out version of the selected map including items which are too far away to be displayed in the network view VLAN display area Displays the selected VLAN ID in the VLAN tree 13 3 2 Map Types This section explains the different types of map available Overall map The overall map displays links between chassis servers and adjacent LAN switches for all the resources managed in Resource Orchestrator Local map button Selecting a resource icon in the network view will show a button on the upper right side of this icon Clicking this button shows the local map Point 606060620606092090906000000909090809000090909909090000090
143. cally searches KMS hosts MANUAL Specify the KMS host When MANUAL is selected make sure to set cmd remotescript 1 params kmsname cmd remotescript The host name FQDN computer name or IP address of the KMS 1 params kmsname host cmd t ipt KMS host port number The default is 1688 1 params kmsport cmd remotescript MAK MAK key a l params makkey Mandatory cmd remotescript Host name FQDN and the port number of the proxy server The host 1 params ieproxy name and port number are separated by a colon Administrator password An existing password setting will be displayed as an encrypted d character string cmd remotescript XE P To edit the password overwrite it with plain text delete the 1 params password ns ER encrypted yes line and perform the encryption procedure indicated in the example If this parameter is not set the password will be re initialized The encryption status of the Administrator password encrypted yes means that the password is encrypted If this line exists the rcxadm deployctl command does not operate j7 Example 06060606200620990000600009099099090900009090990090906000090920900900009090909090909000009909090000900292090000000990600060009999060999 With KMS Automatic Search ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params kmscheck AUTO cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password PASSWO
144. ccount Enter between 8 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols wr ge gn J nan amp ken nje vE np wp NC it m3 gn m nam gt lt Jm LA uw us n SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community name of this server s remote management controller ILOM Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address used by this server on the admin LAN Server OS Category Select the appropriate server OS category Physical OS or VM host Selecting Solaris Containers activates the user name and password input fields Those refer to the user name and password entered during installation of this VM host For a Physical OS Select Solaris For a VM Host Select Solaris Containers and enter the VM host login account information This login account information will be used by Resource Orchestrator to control and communicate with the registered VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority periods or hyphens Enter up to 466 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores This name should start with an alphabet character Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host Enter up to 256 characters inc
145. ce settings have not been configured correctly clear the settings using the rexadm lanctl unset command and then correct the definition file before executing the rcxadm lanctl set command again If anything including user defined checks does not turn out as expected even though the settings were applied correctly check the network connections and the monitoring target and take appropriate action Another test is to either deactivate the port on the LAN switch blade corresponding to the network interface where communications are actually being performed or disconnect the cable from an external port on the LAN switch blade to check whether the spare network interface automatically takes over communication If the standby patrol function is enabled check the port status or check that the status of the standby network interface changes to WAIT after reconnecting the cable 2 Collect a Cloning Image Collect a cloning image from the managed server checked in step 1 For details on how to collect cloning images refer to 17 2 Collecting amp Note Linux When a cloning image is collected any LAN redundancy settings on managed servers are canceled and only network parameters for the defined public LAN are set up again when collection completes If LAN redundancy has been manually set up set the LAN redundancy settings again manually 17 6 2 Maintenance If the network parameter auto configuration function fails an error message is ou
146. ches 11 5 Deleting VM Management Software TLO Clear due Power Monitoring EnviSODIllE 22e tret Pr terrere reet ii t i rU EE REO REP e rera tad 88 116 1 Deleting Power Montormg Devilse iesi nereis d er eo E FO EHE HORDE EDO IEEE PUER ES EE EN TEVEN OE Eiis 88 Xi TF Deities rester EE 89 TLS O nrczistemmz ETERNUS SP Storage CTUISBE cioe teer ier e e ERE E t EORR REEF EXER REO SERERE EGRE Hp eR ERES 89 Chapter 12 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification oNEs s PEE 122 importo he Sye Con OO ON Fleur e bc vasa rr e e eh a Fixe veh ehe tere deep uen ERR FO Sao ta ke SERERE Re RR ET uR 12 3 Expostmm the System CognhsuraBot File missense ineine ioniserer ri rire in e PEE D sate ELE eR EUER O arii RSi Chapter T9 NAWO Map iin ete rete etet teer CE ER teen ee hd cea LE a ee SEED RD HER Le lee 96 MES 0o nm 96 De conn M E R 97 lI 98 ToL Network Map LOOM HER 98 ANDP E eea e a E A E E E A O 99 13 4 Resource Icons 100 ELM 07 2 E 100 Be P AT S r zed consi ep ER E A saevaevena tapes bibcoeiecay E Gove de eatin ai eaeistes aaenae 104 13 41 53 Olber IGOS urere neo ERE E E cusesky sazcegssgssonsdeacoreveskadenseaseaeusssdeagaceds senses seusdoeessaausdssbees 105 LS NOUO EIE cis sds ee dees ag Retreat eben prr iii hei dte i edt e pee bir RR FEE re aatidedeeaiss 106 13 5 1 Link
147. count dialog is displayed 3 Set the following Password No change Change Select the appropriate action By default the No change option is selected Current password Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols This is displayed when general users modify their own passwords New password Confirm password Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols Authority Level No change Change Select the appropriate action By default the No change option is selected Authority level Select either Manage or Monitor By default the current authority level is selected 4 Click OK The password and authority level for the user account are changed Delete User Account Only privileged users can perform this operation When using Single Sign On delete a user account on the directory service as necessary 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed 2 Select the user account to delete and click Delete The Delete User Account dialog is displayed 3 Click OK The selected user account is deleted Chapter 6 BladeViewer This chapter provides an overview of BladeViewer and explains its features Please note that BladeViewer is only available for PRIMERGY BX servers For details on the ROR console refer to Appendix A User Interface 6 1 Overview This section provides a functional overview of B
148. cted by default This feature is available only for PRIMERGY BX blade servers When VIOM is used it is available only when a LAN switch is in switch mode or end host mode Do not select this option if VLAN settings are to be manually adjusted from the LAN switch s management interface either graphical or command line interface Automatically switch over when a server fault is detected checkbox Select this option to enable Auto Recovery Server failures are detected when the server s status changes to error or fatal and its operating system stops functioning Do not select this option if primary servers are to be manually switched over This option is selected by default Power off forced when the server is switched over checkbox Check this checkbox if the spare server is to be turned off forcibly when the spare server in started before switchover takes place When shutting down the spare server clear this checkbox This option is not selected by default 145 Switchover to server where VM guest exists checkbox When a spare server is a VM host check this checkbox if switching to a spare server in which the VM host contains a VM guest When not switching to a VM host which contains a VM guest clear this checkbox This option is not selected by default 3 Click OK The server switchover settings are configured 4 Set the boot agent for the spare server If the Windows manager is used and the primary server is i
149. curs wait for the following message to show in the event log before performing backup again FJSVrcx INFO 23301 server admin LAN information was successfully updated 000602009090929909000009999099000909090990909090000090099909090000090990999909000909909099090000009090992099090000090999090900009999900909099999 118 16 3 Restore This section explains how to restore a system image backup System images can also be restored using commands Refer to Chapter 4 Image Operations in the Reference Guide Command VE for details Restoring a System Image Use the following procedure to restore a system image to a managed server 1 Place the target server into maintenance mode a Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu The Set Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed As the target server is restarted during restoration all of its applications should be stopped beforehand When restoring a VM host all of its VM guests should also be stopped b Click OK The target server is placed into maintenance mode 2 Restore a system image To restore the system image from the server resource tree a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Backup Restore Restore from the popup menu The Restore dialog is displayed b Select the system im
150. ddress For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations In a clustered manager configuration use the following procedure to register an IP address as the manager s admin LAN IP address Windows Manager 1 Cancel registry replication settings On the primary node bring online the shared disk and IP address and take all other resources offline Next remove the following registry key from the registry replication settings set for the PXE Services cluster resource x64 SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu S ystemcastWizard DHCP x86 SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard DHCP Use the following procedure to remove the registry key a In the Failover Cluster Management window right click the PXE Services resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The PXE Services Properties window will be displayed b In the Registry Replication tab select the above registry key c Click lt Remove gt The selected key is removed from the Root registry key list d After removing the registry key click lt Apply gt e Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 2 Change the manager IP address on the primary node On the primary node use the rexadm mgrctl modify command to set the new IP address gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt 3 Restore registry replication setti
151. de 1 Move to node rode name from the displayed menu The name of the primary node is displayed for node name 7 On the primary node take the manager s shared disk and IP address offline Linux Manager 1 Change the IP address set for the admin LAN Set a new IP address on the primary node using the following command opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt De activate the admin server s takeover logical IP address Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line interface to de activate the takeover logical IP address For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual Register the takeover logical IP address as a PRIMECLUSTER resource Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line interface to register the virtual interface as a PRIMECLUSTER resource For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual Mount the shared disk Mount the shared disk for managers on the primary node Change the settings of the DHCP service When registering the admin LAN subnet When registering an admin LAN subnet change the file below and set the DHCP server for the takeover logical IP address File name Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 etc dhcpd conf Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 etc dhcp dhcpd conf Change the takeover logical IP address in the following line to the new takeover logical IP address option dhcp server identifier takeover logical IP address 58 p Example When the takeover
152. de name from the displayed menu The name of the primary node is displayed for node name 2 Delete the registry replication settings from the following Services and Applications of the manager Based on the following table delete registry replication for the resources x64 49 Resources for HKEY LOCAL MACHINEJSOFTWAREWow6432NodeWujitsu SystemcastWizard ResourceDepot Deployment Service HKEY LOCAL MACHINEJSOFTWAREWow6432NodeWujitsu SystemcastWizard DatabaseBroker Default HKEY LOCAL MACHINEJSOFTWAREWow6432NodeWujitsu SystemcastWizard DHCP PXE Services HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu SystemcastWizard PXE ClientBoot x86 Resources for HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu Systemcast Wizard ResourceDepot Deployment Service HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu Systemcast Wizard DatabaseBroker Default HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard DHCP PXE Services HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard PXE ClientBoot Perform the following procedure for each of the above resources a Right click the target resource on Other Resources on the Summary of RC manager displayed in the middle of the Failover Cluster Management window and select Properties from the displayed menu The target_resource Properties window will be displayed b From the Root Registry Key displayed on the Registry Replication tab select the above reg
153. e chassis01 192 168 3 150 public PRIMERGY PartitionModelChassis operation chassis name ip address snmp community name mgmt user name mgmt passwd mgmt passwd enc pqchassis0 192 168 3 207 public administrator administrator plain pqchassis1 192 168 3 208 public administrator administrator plain SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis operation chassis name ip address snmp community name mgmt user name mgmt passwd mgmt passwd enc spechassis 192 168 3 212 public fujitsu fujitsu plain LanSwitch operation chassis name slot no switch name address esnmp community name user name passwd passwd enc privile ged passwd privileged passwd enc product name connection type chassisO1 1 switch 01 192 168 3 161 public admin admin plain admin plain BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 telnet chassisO1 2 switch 02 192 168 3 162 public admin admin plain admin plain BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 telnet LanSwitchNet operation chassis name slot no port no vlan id chassisO1 1 31 1 U 10 T 20 T chassis01 1 32 1 U chassis01 1 33 1 U chassisO1 1 34 1 U chassis01 1 35 1 U chassis01 1 36 1 U chassisO1 1 37 1 U chassis01 1 38 1 U chassis01 1 39 1 U chassisO1 1 40 1 U chassis01 1 41 1 U chassisO1 1 42 1 U chassisO1 1 43 1 U chassisO1 1 44 1 U chassisO1 2 31 1 U 10 T 20 T chassisO1 2 32 1 U chassisO1 2 33 1 U chassis01 2 34 1 U chassis01 2 35 1 U chassis01 2 36 1 U chassis01 2 37 1 U chassis01 2 38 1 U chas
154. e HBA address rename setup service according to step 12 9 2 2 Changing the Port Number Used to Communicate with the Admin Server This section explains how to change the port used between the HBA address rename setup service and the admin server The HBA address rename setup service uses the rcxweb port to communicate with the admin server When this setting is changed the HBA address rename setup service automatically checks whether it can communicate with the new admin server IP address Changing this setting also requires changing the port on the admin server side beforehand Use the following procedure to change the port numbers used to communicate with the admin server 1 Change the port number of the manager Change the rcxweb port number according to the instructions given in 8 2 Changing Port Numbers 2 Change the port number of the HBA address rename setup service Refer to Chapter 6 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide VE and change the port to the same port number 9 2 3 Changing the IP Address of the HBA address rename Server This section explains how to change the IP address of the HBA address rename server Use the following procedure to change the IP address of the HBA address rename server 1 Log in to the HBA address rename server with administrator authority 2 Stop the HBA address rename setup service Stop the HBA address rename setup service according to Chapter 6 Settings fo
155. e admin server The following values are guidelines Table 9 1 Polling Interval Polling Interval Number of Devices that can be Monitored Simultaneously 5 minutes Up to 40 devices 10 minutes Up to 60 devices Use a polling interval of 5 minutes or longer when monitoring chassis and servers Use a polling interval of 10 minutes if monitoring more than 40 devices Data storage period Enter storage periods for each collection rate Data older than the configured storage period will be deleted every day Enlarging data storage periods reduces the number of devices that can be monitored simultaneously Use the default storage period values when monitoring chassis and servers 3 Click Apply The new settings are applied amp Note Ce If the Power checkbox under Data to collect is cleared the collection of power consumption data including the calculation of hourly daily and other summarized data will not be performed anymore 9 6 2 Canceling Collection Settings for Power Monitoring Environments This section explains how to cancel the collection of power consumption data 78 Use the following procedure to cancel the collection of power consumption data 1 Select Tools Options from the ROR console menu The Options dialog is displayed 2 Click the Environmental Data category title and modify the values for the following items in the displayed area Data to collect Clear the Power checkbox 3 Click
156. e different VM guest statuses refer to Table 6 3 Status Icons in 6 3 1 Status Panel A user defined label is displayed on the upper right side of the VM guest icon If no label is set The OS name is displayed If the OS name cannot be acquired because the OS has not been installed or for other reasons The VM guest name is displayed An OS icon is displayed below the label For details on the different OS icons refer to Table 6 10 OS Icons in 6 3 3 1 Resource List Tab A power button is displayed on the lower right side of each VM guest This power button represents the power status of each VM guest as shown below rom 6 14 VM ca Power e Power button button Coor O Staus Green blinking Power ON in progress Power ON or reboot in progress 17 e P OFF i 5 Orange blinking Power OFF in progress progress A Information The power status of a VM guest can be easily controlled by clicking on its power button Refer to 6 4 2 VM Guest for details 06060000009209000000099909000009090909900400000909009909909090000090999000000090992040000000099090909900000090909909000000990990999090000099299 6 3 4 Resource Details To view a resource s details click on its icon chassis LAN switch or physical server icon from the blade panel Chassis Clicking a chassis icon from the blade panel opens up its management blade s Web interface in a new window This Web interface p
157. e drop down menu Select one of the following options Finest sampling Hourly Daily Monthly Annual 3 Click OK In the download dialog that is displayed specify the name of the export file The data will be exported to the specified file amp Note Exporting large amounts of data will take time The operation will fail when it takes over five minutes If the operation fails as processing on the server may not have finished wait for a while before performing the operation again In that case change the settings of Target Resources and Output time span to reduce the amount of data output The recommended export settings for environmental data are as listed below Table 19 1 Recommended export settings Output time span Output device count Hourly 149 Output time span Output device count Monthly Select Custom and specify 5 years foo 19 2 Displaying Power Consumption Data Graphs This section explains how to display power consumption data as graphs The power consumption data for each power monitoring target that is registered in the power monitoring environment can be displayed as graphs The collected power consumption data and average values of the specified time span and rate can be displayed in line graphs Use the following procedure to display power consumption data as graphs 1 Select Tools Environmental Data Graph from the ROR console menu The Environmental Data Grap
158. e name 5 Click Save B 2 File Format The system configuration files CSV format used for pre configuration are comma delimited The format of each line is given below File Format Definition The first line of the file must begin with the following Point Resource Orchestrator can import the following system configuration file formats RCXCSV V1 0 RCXCSV V2 0 RCXCSV V3 0 RCXCSV V3 1 RCXCSV V3 2 RCXCSV V3 3 RCXCSV V3 4 RCXCSV V3 5 However system definition files are always exported in the most recent format importing a file in an older format and re exporting it will produce a file in the latest format Note 0060099909000009099909909909000090900990900090090909092909909909090090999090990000099909909000000990999099099090000999909090000099990900909099999 Although each RCXCSV version has a different format those formats are retro compatible newer formats include all the information defined in older formats As detailed below some sections described in B 3 Resource Definitions are only available with the latest format s RCXCSV V2 0 and Later LanSwitchNet ServerAgent ServerVMHost PowerDevice Memo RCXCSV V3 0 and Later VMManager RCXCSV V3 1 and Later SPARCEnterprise 187 RCXCSV V3 2 and Later PRIMERGYPartitionModelChassis PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer RCXCSV V3 3 and Later Subnet SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis SPARCEnterpriseP
159. e panel click on its icon in the chassis panel In the blade panel the selected chassis and its LAN switches are represented by the following icons Those icons are displayed in the upper part of the blade panel Table 6 5 Chassis Icon m fe Table 6 6 LAN Switch Icon See For details on the status icons that are displayed for the chassis and its LAN switches refer to Table 6 3 Status Icons of 6 3 1 Status Panel 6 3 3 1 Resource List Tab The blade panel graphically displays each slot within a chassis Each server or storage blade is displayed according to their actual position slot within the chassis Note that an unregistered server is shown in light gray while an empty slot is shown in white 13 Figure 6 3 Blade Panel Resource List erver a euoe unDewu Server Blade A power button is displayed in the upper part of each server blade This power button is used to represent the power status of each server as shown below Table 6 7 Server Blade Power Buttons owertiton Coor Sms Meme o Green lit Power ON status Gray not lit Power OFF status Power ON Power OFF in progress Orange blinking Power OFF in progress o Green blinking Power ON or reboot in progress in progress A Information The power status of a server blade can be easily controlled by clicking on its power button For details refer to 6 4 1 Server Blade 6060606
160. e port numbers Edit the following file etc opt FJS Vscw common scwconf reg In PortBase under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard CLONE set the first value of the port number to be used by deployment services This value should be entered in hexadecimal format To avoid conflicts with ephemeral ports use a value not included in the ephemeral port range defined by net ipv4 local port range However as a maximum of 16 port numbers are used for image file creation and deployment ensure that the port numbers for PortBase to PortBase 15 do not conflict with ephemeral or well known ports This ensures that deployment services will use ports outside of the range defined by netipv4 ip local port range for image operations Moreover be sure to set a value lower than 65519 for PortBase so that the highest port number PortBase 15 does not exceed the largest valid port number 65534 In a clustered manager configuration change port numbers on both the primary and secondary node 2 Restart the server on which the port number has been changed p Information The related services allow managed servers to boot from the network using a dedicated module stored on the admin server during backup restore or cloning Note that changing port numbers on the admin server alone is enough to support communication during the above image operations Therefore no additional configuration is required on the managed servers 6060606
161. e set up manually PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services cannot be used to enable admin LAN redundancy on servers running SUSE Linux Enterprise Server or Oracle Enterprise Linux operating systems 060606000009090990900000909909000009099000000002009909090900009090909090000090909090000000009099090900000099090000000999090000009999 Setup Procedure Use the following procedure to set up network parameters for a public LAN Point 0606060606020209090606000009009090000900990000009009290900000090909909000000099090090000009299090900000009909992000000990900000099299 Using a specific managed server reference server to collect and update cloning images is recommended in order to centrally manage the network parameters definition files 1 Definition File Settings This section explains how to setup the following definition files FJSVrex conf ipaddr conf Create those definition files under the following folder on the reference server 136 Windows Installa Installa Linux tion_folden Agent etc FJS Vrcx conf tion foldeNAgentVetcNipaddr conf etc FJSVrex conf etc opt FJS Vnrmp lan ipaddr conf Sample configuration of the definition file FJSVrcx conf admin LAN 192 168 1 11 hostname node A admin LAN Enter the IP address used by the reference server on the admin LAN hostname Enter the physical server name of the reference server Format of the definition file ipaddr conf The definition file is made up
162. e to delete VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Select None from the VLAN type of the port number to delete VLANs or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN ID is deleted 9 4 3 Re discovering LAN Switches Newly added LAN switches can be discovered by re executing LAN switch discovery For details on LAN switch discovery refer to Discovery in 7 4 2 Registering LAN Switches 9 5 Changing VM Management Software Settings This section explains how to change VM management software settings The following settings can be changed Location IP address UserID Password Here the method for changing settings registered with Resource Orchestrator is explained Complete re configuration within the VM management software admin console before performing this procedure Use the following procedure to change VM management software settings 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Management Software name Settings dialog is displayed The name of the selected VM managemen
163. e003 1 1 U blade003 3 1 U blade003 5 1 U blade001 2 1 U blade001 4 1 U blade001 6 1 U blade002 2 1 U blade002 4 1 U blade002 6 1 U blade003 2 1 U blade003 4 1 U blade003 6 1 U SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelServer operation chassis name partition no server name ip address spechassis 3 speserver3 192 168 3 213 spechassis 4 speserver4 192 168 3 214 Server WWNN operation server name port count wwnn blade001 1 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 01 blade002 1 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 02 210 SpareServer operation server name spare server vlan switch auto switch boot type spare server force off spare server with vm g uest blade001 blade003 ON ON local OFF OFF VMManager operation name ip address product login name login passwd passwd enc CenterServer 127 0 0 1 vmware vc Administrator admin plain ServerAgent operation server name blade001 rackmount001 rackmount002 ServerVMHost operation server_name vm_login_name vm_login_passwd vm_passwd_enc blade002 admin admin plain MonitorSetting operation server name ping timeout recovery action reboot count blade001 600 reboot and switchover 3 PowerDevice operation device name ip address snmp community name voltage comment ups1 192 168 3 196 public 100 SmartUPS ups2 192 168 3 197 public 100 SmartUPS Memo operation resource type resource name label comment common TEL 0000 0000 211 Appe
164. ed automatically For this reason it should be registered while it is stopped To delete a spare server that has been added refer to 18 4 Canceling Server Switchover Settings When using the storage affinity switchover method after switchover to spare servers if failback is performed the storage settings for spare servers will be deleted For how to restore storage settings refer to 4 2 Switchover and 4 3 Post Switchover Operations in the Operation Guide VE Local boot with SAN data Backup and restore method checkbox This checkbox is available only if the WWN of the servers selected from the server resource tree are being virtualized using HBA address rename or VIOM The checkbox is unavailable if the WWN is not being virtualized or boot configuration is set for a VIOM server profile Select this option for servers that boot from a local disk while using SAN storage to store data If selected spare server s will also be able to boot locally and access the same SAN storage data space after a switchover Do not select this option for servers that boot from a SAN disk Apply network settings when the server is switched over checkbox Select this option to enable automatic adjustment of VLAN ID or port group settings during a server switchover If selected the internal LAN switch ports connected to the spare server will be set with the same VLAN settings as those of the ports connected to the primary server This option is sele
165. ed below The password is changed after entering the required information and clicking Change 293 Privileged user New password Confirm password Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols General user Current password Enter the password that is currently set Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols New password Confirm password Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols 24 Chapter 7 Registering Resources This chapter explains how to register change and delete resources used by Resource Orchestrator The Resource Orchestrator manager must be completely installed beforehand In addition to the usual method of registering each resource individually it is also possible to register or change registration settings of multiple resources in batches using the pre configuration function Registering or modifying resources individually This method is used when the number of servers to be installed is small from one to four or when adding a similar number of servers to an existing environment Registering or modifying multiple resources collectively This method is used when there are many five or more servers to be installed For information on how to register and modify multiple resources together refer to Chapter 12 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification A Information User Accounts When creating new us
166. efer to Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations Restart the manager Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE Select the Image List tab in the ROR console and confirm the image list is same as before Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations Settings differ depending on the operating system used for the manager Windows Manager 1 Cancel registry replication settings Bring the manager s shared disk online and take all other resources offline Next remove the following registry key from the registry replication settings set for the Deployment Service cluster resource x64 SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu S ystemcastWizard ResourceDepot x86 SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard ResourceDepot Use the following procedure to remove the registry key 63 a Inthe Failover Cluster Management window right click the Deployment Service resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The Deployment Service Properties window is displayed b In the Registry Replication tab select the above registry key c Click Remove The selected key is removed from the Root registry key list d After removing the registry key click Apply e Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 2 Change the location of the image file storage folder Change the location of the image file storage folder accord
167. en to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis name in the PRIMERGY PartitionModelChassis section partition no The number of a partition Enter a number between 0 and 3 server name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens If enclosed by parentheses this server will be seen as being in a switched over state and this line will be ignored when importing the system definition file Note Server names should be unique between all servers Names are not case sensitive ip address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods amp Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources boot option Specify the boot option configured from BIOS when installing the OS When installing using a legacy boot legacy When installing using UEFI uefi Server Blade VLAN Data Section Name Enter ServerNet as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line 201 server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section nic no This is the index number of the server blade s network interface Enter a num
168. er accounts changing passwords or modifying permission levels during setup refer to Chapter 5 Managing User Accounts Backing up the Admin Server The admin server should be backed up after the entire system has been completely set up or after registering changing or deleting resources For information about backing up the admin server refer to Chapter 9 Backup and Restoration of Admin Servers in the Operation Guide VE 000600000990920900000009920990900009099009009000000900990990900000090999900000009092090000000909090909900000090992090000099099090000020999299 7 1 Registering VIOM Coordination Use the following procedure to configure management software settings 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Register Management Software VIOM The Register Management Software VIOM dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined User ID Enter the ID of a VIOM user account Password Enter the password of the above VIOM user account 3 Click OK 7 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles Use the following procedure to configure VIOM server profiles 1 Select Management Software VIOM from the ROR console and then select the Resource Details tab 2 In General of the Resource Details tab click the link for the Management software The Web interface of ServerView Virtual IO Manager starts up 3 Refer to the ServerView Virtual IO Manager manual to configure serve
169. er the name of a SNMP community with read permission configured on this server s remote management controller XSCF Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens mgmt_user_name Enter the name of a remote management controller XSCF user account with administrative privileges platadm privileges Enter a string of up to 31 alphanumeric characters hyphens and underscores This name must start with an alphabet character mgmt passwd Enter the password of the remote management controller XSCF user account on Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols np gn gn Qe An amp aen p NN ph yt We y zw gn a Ne wr U en n Nm om m n n mgmt passwd enc Enter one of the following f mgmt_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted LAN Switch Blade Data Section Name Enter LanSwitch as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis name in the Chassis section slot no Enter the slot number where the LAN switch blade is installed Enter a number between 1 and 8 switch name Enter the name to assign to this LAN switch blade Enter a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters underscores
170. es the properties of a power monitoring devices are not automatically updated Use this option to update them manually when necessary Table A 14 Popup Menus Available for Management Software Popup Menu Function Management Software vCenter Registers VM management software VMware vCenter Server Server Management Software SCVMM Registers M management software System Center Register Virtual Machine Manager M t Soft OVM Registers management software OVM Manager Manager Management Software VIOM Registers VM management software VIOM Popup Menu Function Modify Registration Settings Modifies registration settings for management software 163 A 3 Status Panel This section explains the different statuses that are displayed in the ROR console Figure A 3 Status Panel Status Monitoring Area Resource Status Area Monitoring events i Total 9 units I Stopped 3 units SError 0 units Bil waming 0 units Last updated 2009 06 25 15 07 02 Status Monitoring Area The Event Log monitors a history of events that have occurred on managed resources Based on detected events the status monitoring area will change color and blink Clicking the status monitoring area will stop the blinking The following table details the different statuses and their associated corrective actions Table A 16 Monitor Status List eer Back F This indicates a normal state Monitor
171. et on the management blade Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read write permission as that set on the management blade Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens PRIMEQUEST Chassis Management Data Section Name Enter PRIMERGYPartitionModelChassis as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line 192 chassis name Enter the name that will be used to identify the chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 amp Note Chassis names should be unique between all chassis Names are not case sensitive e00060600002929909209200009000999929099090000000909092099900990990900000099990992909209090090000909929929000000009029299 ip address Enter the same IP address as that set on the management board Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources 0 06006000090909092990900909900000009002999090909900000090909090900209000090000090090929909090929090000009009290909029000000009099999 snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read write permission as that se
172. ettings go I Registers VM management software VMware vCenter Server Registers VM management software System Center Virtual Machine Manager Registers VM management software VIOM Modifies a resource s registration settings Modifies the HBA address rename settings of a server Modifies the network settings of a LAN switch Modifies a server s recovery settings Modifies the monitoring information for a server Modifies the WWN settings for a server Modifies the registered login account Monitoring Settings WWN Settings 7 VM Host Login Account used to communicate with the VM host Adds changes and deletes user accounts Performs viewing registration Yes 8 changing or deletion of the admin LAN subnet information Ye Updates a resource Available hes 1 Powers on a server User Accounts Operatio n Admin LAN Subnet F 156 Privileged User OFF Yes OFF Forced Yes Reboot Forced Yes LED 4 Failback Restore LAN Switch 9 Settings Y Spare Server 2 6 9 Yes Yes Hardware Maintenance Y n S Yes Maintenance Mode 2 Yes Yes Backup Restore 2 Yes Cloning 2 10 Yes Yes Yes VM Home Position Topology Environmental Data Graph Back to Home Discover LAN switches Detect physical links Yes Yes Yes es Y Y Y es es 157 General User Function N Powers off a server after shu
173. f the physical OS VM host or VM guest is displayed Type The type of the OS running on the server is displayed One of the following is displayed Physical OS VM Host VM Guest OS The type of the OS running on the server is displayed Physical server name The name of the server on which the physical OS VM host or VM guest is operating is displayed Not displayed for VM guests 173 wA See Refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE for details on resource statuses 606060602009029200000009090990909090009090909090900000090909909909000000909909090000909090909090900000900990990000009099000000900990909200000909299 VM Host Information Area The following information is displayed only for VM Hosts VM type The type of the VM is displayed VM software name The name of the VM software used is displayed VM software VL The version and level of the VM software used is displayed Number of VM guests The number of VM guests is displayed VM management software The link to the web interface of a server virtualization software is displayed VM guests A list of hosted VM guests is displayed VM Home Positions VM Guests A list of the VM guests with the selected VM host set as their VM Home Position is displayed VM Guest Information Area The following information is displayed only for VM guests VM type The type of the VM is displayed VM host name The name of the VM host on which the VM guest is stored is di
174. fied server switchover method Automatic server recovery Shows whether automatic server recovery is enabled or not Network switchover Shows whether network settings will be automatically adjusted during server switchover Spare server Displays the name of the physical server that will replace the current active server when server switchover occurs More than one spare server will be displayed if more than one has been specified 18 2 Settings for Server Switchover Use the following procedure to configure server switchover settings When using local disks as system disks and iSCSI storage as data disks refer to the advisory notes described in Table 8 1 Supported Storage Device Configurations in 8 1 1 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide VE 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click a server or a physical OS or VM host on the server and select Modify Spare Server Settings from the popup menu The Spare Server Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Spare server From the spare server list select the checkbox in the Select column of the server that is to be used as the spare server One or more spare servers can be specified including spare servers from different chassis If more than one is specified an unused spare server will be selected from the list of available candidates when a server switchover Occurs A Information For SPARC Enterp
175. formation such as OS name server name for a physical OS the physical server name for a VM guest the VM guest name and IP address are displayed to help identify the selected server Clicking Save saves the modified label and comment into the manager s database The saved content is then updated and displayed in BladeViewer General user If logged in as a general user Show is displayed in place of Modify in the Label List dialog Clicking Show displays the Server Properties dialog but does not allow editing of labels or comments 6 5 2 Editing Contacts Clicking the Tools icon and selecting Set Contact Information from the drop down list displays the Set Contact Information dialog This function is only available to privileged users If logged in as a general user the Set Contact Information menu item cannot be selected Enter the following item Contact The currently defined contact information is displayed Enter a maximum of 256 characters amp Note New lines are counted as two characters Clicking Save saves the modified contact information into the manager s database The saved content will be displayed the next time the Contact dialog is opened 6 5 3 Changing Passwords Clicking the Tools icon and selecting Change Password from the drop down list displays the Change Password dialog The required information varies according to the authority level of the logged in user as describ
176. fter the server has been deleted the maintenance LED is switched OFF automatically Deleting a server on which both the HBA address rename function and a VM high availability feature provided by the server virtualization software used are enabled will produce the following behavior The server will be powered off causing the high availability feature to trigger its VM recovery process To avoid interruption of hosted applications during server deletion it is recommended to move VM guests to another server beforehand For more details on the high availability features available for each server virtualization software refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE 00606000090999090000090909909990900009090909099099090000909092909909990000909099990000909090990900900009909999090009009999000000990909000000999 11 3 Canceling VIOM Integration This section explains how to cancel VIOM integration Use the following procedure to cancel VIOM integration 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software VIOM and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target management software VIOM is deleted To delete registered VIOM server profiles follow the procedure described in 7 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles to open the Web interface of ServerView Virtual IO Manager and delete the desired profiles from there G amp
177. g 11 Can only be selected for VM guests Table A 7 Popup Menus Available for Physical OSs Solaris Popup Menu Function C CREE 7707 277 77 NN Eme SES Modifies a SPARC Enterprise server s monitoring Monitoring Settings a ERAN Powers on a SPARC Powers on a SPARC Enterprise server server Powers off a SPARC Enterprise server after shutting down its operating system OFF Forced Powers off a SPARC Enterprise server without shutting orce down its operating system 161 Popup Menu Function REDOGIS a SPARC Enterprise server after shutting down its operating system Reboot Forced Reboots a SPARC Enterprise server without shutting down its operating system Switchover Switches over a server with one of its spare servers over a server with one Switches over a server with one of its spare servers its spare servers Failback Switches back a server to its pre switchover state Spare Server Accepts a switched over configuration as final without Takeover SEM N switching back to the original configuration Maintenance Mode Release Sets a server to active mode External Management Opens external server management software for SPARC Software Enterprise servers Table A 8 Popup Menus Available for LAN Switches Popup Menu ae pemestams i Fa estt 0 Network Settings the VLAN settings of a LAN switch s external ports Restore lE 77 Restores a LAN swi
178. g points when shutting down or rebooting a PRIMEQUEST managed server If rebooting is attempted for a server that has been placed into hardware maintenance mode the operation fails and only powering off is performed 109 Windows Take caution regarding the following points when shutting down or rebooting a managed server running a Windows operating system If Windows is not configured to shut down when the computer s power button is pressed the power operations in Resource Orchestrator may not function properly To check this option access the Control Panel open the Power Options and check the settings of the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window If a file is being edited by a logged in user a dialog prompting the user to save the file is displayed and the system may not shut down immediately In such cases shutdown does not take place until the user takes the appropriate action or a specified time approximately five minutes has elapsed VM Host Take caution regarding the following points when powering off or rebooting a VM host When using a server virtualization software s high availability feature confirm that the server is set to VM maintenance mode within that virtualization software This can be confirmed from the virtualization software client Perform power operations only after setting VM maintenance mode either from the VM management software client or using the resource contro
179. get server a Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target physical OS or VM host and select Backup Restore Backup from the popup menu The Backup dialog is displayed 117 b Set the following items as necessary Comments Enter a comment to identify the system image A comment can be up to 128 characters long Use of percent signs 96 backslashes V double quotes and linefeed characters are not allowed G Note A list of the resources that will be powered off during backup is displayed in the text area Confirm that it is safe to shut down those resources before continuing with the backup operation When backing up a VM host all of its VM guests will also be stopped c Click lt OK gt Backup of the system image is started The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console When lt Cancel gt is clicked in the Recent Operations area the confirmation dialog to quit the process is displayed After backing up a VM host stop and back up all of its VM guests For details on VM guest backup refer to the server virtualization software manual 3 Release the target server from maintenance mode before resuming its applications a Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu The Release Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click OK
180. h With Port VLANs Use the following procedure to change VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Select Untagged from the VLAN type of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN ID is changed With Tagged VLANs First delete the VLAN ID was set on the desired LAN switch blade port before setting the new VLAN ID Use the following procedure to change VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed 295 Physical Port Link Aggregation Select None from the VLAN type of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN ID set for the selected LAN switch blade port is released 4 Repeat step 1 and set the new VLAN ID in the VLAN Settings dialog VLAN Select Create new or Change in the VLAN information and select the VLAN ID to be changed Physical
181. h dialog is displayed 2 Set the following items Figure 19 2 Environmental Data Graph dialog Environmental Data Graph Choose the desired resources ard output time Up to 18 resources can be selected Target Resources ill Chassis B Server o Power Monitoring Device Select Resource Name j Resowce Type O bx900 Chassis ej L bx800 2 Server O bxeo0 3 Server O bx800 4 Server L bx800 6 Server L bx800 7 Server O bx800 8 Server O bx800 9 Server L bxeo0040 Server vi Graph Settings Power Instantaneous power consumption Data Type O Average power Average power consumption during the selected time span paren Wis Span Rate Finest sampling v Graph Output 150 Target Resources Specify the power monitoring target name to display the power consumption data graph of Select the checkboxes of each desired target Up to 18 targets can be selected Graph Settings Data Type Specify the type of data to display the graph Specify either one of the following for the data type Power Instantaneous power consumption Average power Average power consumption during the selected time span Output Time Span Select the time span for the data from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Last hour Last day Last week Last month Last year Custom When Custom is selected the following fields must all be specified Start day Start time End da
182. haracters underscores and hyphens voltage Enter the voltage V that is being supplied to the power monitoring device Enter a number between 10 and 999 Note 0000602009090929299909099090900009090909990990909099090000009099099090020909009000000900909999090990900000000999909909909099090000000999999 Resource Orchestrator calculates power consumption data using the electrical current value obtained from the power monitoring device and its specified voltage comment optional Enter any comments for the power monitoring device Enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e Note Ce A line break is counted as one character Use Alt Enter to enter line breaks 207 Memo Section Name Enter Memo as the section name This is required when registering the labels comments and contact information displayed in BladeViewer using the pre configuration function Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line resource type Enter the type of the resource for which to set this memo Enter one of the following When a physical server including a VM host is specified physical server When a VM guest is specified vm guest When contact information is specified common resource name Enter the name of the resource name for which to set this memo Enter one of the following When resource
183. he Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change SNMP Community 4 Click OK The SNMP community is changed 9 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings This section explains how to modify server management unit settings Forrack mount or tower servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller settings 1 Change settings on the remote management controller If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority 2 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change the Remote Management Controller IP address To modify user account information select the Modify remote management controller login account checkbox and change the User ID and Password of the Remote management controller For SPARC Enterprise M3000 servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller XSCF settings 1 Change settings on the remote management controller XSCF If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority platadm privileges 2 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change the Remote Management Controller
184. he first time the ROR console is displayed Otherwise the last view used before logging out either the ROR console or BladeViewer is displayed Chapter 4 License Setup and Confirmation This chapter explains how to configure and confirm licenses License Setup When using Resource Orchestrator it is necessary to configure the license first Use the following procedure to configure the license 1 After logging in to Resource Orchestrator select Tools Licenses from the menu and click Add in the displayed dialog The Register License dialog is displayed 2 In the Register License dialog enter the license key to register 3 Click OK The license will be registered When using a command execute the rexadm license command For details on the rexadm license command refer to 5 10 rcxadm license in the Reference Guide Command VE Confirming the License Use the following procedure to confirm the registered license 1 After logging in to Resource Orchestrator select Tools Licenses from the menu and click the license name in the displayed dialog The Licenses dialog is displayed When using a command execute the rcxadm license command For details on the rexadm license command refer to 5 10 rcxadm license in the Reference Guide Command VE amp Note When is displayed for NUMBER OF LICENSES the same number of agents as purchased licenses can be used Chapter 5 Managing User Accounts
185. he following conditions must be met Primary servers with HBA address rename configured Spare servers with the server switchover method HBA address rename configured For any servers that do not meet these conditions cancel any existing recovery settings before enabling the HBA address rename function on a server HBA address rename and VIOM cannot be used together within the same chassis When using PRIMEQUEST FC cards set with HBA address rename cannot use the PHP function Restarting of a server is required after replacing the FC card 006060600009990900000909990990900900090990909090000900909909090900000909090990000009090909099099090000090990909909000000999090000000929090909000090999 1 Storage Settings Refer to 8 2Configuring the Storage Environment in the Design Guide VE to configure the storage When altering the configuration of a storage device already used by active servers ensure those servers are powered off before performing any configuration changes 2 Settings for the HBA address rename Function On the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or the physical OS or VM host on the server and select Modify HBA Address Rename Settings from the popup menu The HBA Address Rename Settings dialog is displayed 40 2 Define the following settings WWNN Specify the WWNN value provided by the I O virtualization Option The admin server generates WWPNs automatically fr
186. he following procedure to change an admin LAN subnet 71 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Admin LAN Subnet The Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 2 Select the subnet to change The Change Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 3 In the Change Admin LAN Subnet dialog set the following items Subnet name The name must start with an alphabetic character and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters long including underscores hyphens and periods Network address Enter valid values for the network address Subnet mask Enter valid values for the subnet mask Gateway Enter the settings for the gateway used for communication with the admin server on the admin LAN 4 Click Change 5 Click OK G amp Note When changing the information for a subnet other than the one the admin server belongs to if there is even 1 managed server belonging to the target subnet the Network address and Subnet mask cannot be changed When changing the Network address or Subnet mask refer to the Modification Procedure when there are Managed Servers Belonging to Different Subnets Modification Procedure when there are Managed Servers Belonging to Different Subnets When there are managed servers in the target subnet change the network address or the subnet mask using the following procedure 1 Register the subnet information using the new network address or subnet mask 2 Use the following pr
187. he resulted configuration induced from the definition file is correct d Collect the cloning image again 3 Deploy the collected cloning image to the newly added servers Modifying Managed Server Settings If network settings must be modified due to the addition or removal a public LAN or a change of IP address perform the following on an arbitrary reference server chosen between already running servers Execute the rcxadm lanctl unset command to clear the network parameters configuration 2 Edit the definition file to add modify or delete network parameters 3 Execute the rcxadm lanctl set command to apply the network parameters and ensure that the resulted configuration induced from the definition file is correct 4 Collect a new cloning image from the reference server 143 Chapter 18 Server Switchover Settings This chapter explains how to use server switchover settings and automatically recover from server failures 18 1 Status Display Current recovery settings can be confirmed by selecting a physical OS or VM host in the server resource tree of the ROR console and from the spare server settings displayed in the Resource Details tab The following information is displayed Primary server Displays the name of the physical server that will be replaced when server switchover occurs Active server Displays the name of the physical server that is currently running Server switchover method Displays the speci
188. he server is complete Click lt OK gt The registered server will be displayed in the server resource tree amp Note After registering the server please verify that the information registered for the remote management controller is correct This can be verified by trying out power operations from Resource Orchestrator against that server Refer to Chapter 14 Power Control for power operations When using HBA address rename setup service please confirm that the registered server can boot properly using the HBA address rename setup service If the server cannot be booted properly ensure that the specified MAC address NIC2 is correct When an agent is registered on a VM host all VM guests running on that VM host are also registered automatically Whenever a VM guest is created modified deleted or moved on a registered VM host the changes are automatically updated in the server resource tree The VM guest name displayed in the ROR console is either the VM name defined in its server virtualization software or the host name defined in the guest OS The timing at which the hostname of a guest OS is detected and displayed varies according its server virtualization software For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE Itis recommended not to use duplicate names for physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests If duplicated names are used those resources cannot be managed from the command l
189. he user account specified in 2 1 Installing the Manager in the Setup Guide VE When logging in for the first time the ROR console is displayed However when Single Sign On is configured the ROR console is always displayed Opening the ROR console in multiple Web browsers may not allow multi user login To log in as a different user start up a new Web browser from the Windows start menu 0606060000909000000090990990990900009090909909099000009090909909099090000090909099099000009090990909000000909090990000000090990990900000009090900009999 Logout To log out select Logout in the global header and click OK in the confirmation dialog G amp G Note 0006060009929099090000099909909909009099909209000009090990990909000000909990909990009990909900000090990992099090000099909000009999099009090099999 If the Web browser is closed without logging out first user authentication may be skipped the next time Resource Orchestrator is accessed In that case users will be automatically logged in using the previously used session It is advised that the users log out properly after using the ROR console or BladeViewer If the ROR console or BladeViewer has been opened simultaneously in several Web browser windows those login sessions may be terminated Chapter 2 Home This chapter explains the ROR Console Home window display When the ROR Console is started the Home window is displayed Refer to Chapter 1 Login and Logout for inform
190. hen necessary for example to register servers and change various settings Otherwise the last view used before logging out either the ROR console or BladeViewer is displayed 6 3 Resource Status Monitoring This section explains how to monitor resource statuses using BladeViewer ll 6 3 1 Status Panel The status panel displays a summary of resources statuses including resources other than PRIMERGY BX servers When a problem occurs in the system a red or yellow light icon starts blinking on the left side of the status panel Clicking the light icon changes its color back to gray The table below shows the status and meaning associated with each light icon Table 6 1 Light Icons m9 Gray not lit No errors or warnings have been detected in the system Yell cae A warning has been detected in the system Red He Error An error has been detected in the system blinking A Information When the light icon blinks it means that a warning or an error has been detected Check the location of the problem from the chassis or blade panel If Blade Viewer shows no resources with a warning or error status in either the chassis panel or blade panel switch to the ROR console and check the event log to identify the cause of the problem To the right of the light icon BladeViewer shows the number of servers with an error warning normal and stop status Table 6 2 Displaying the Server Icon and the Number of Units Icon a
191. iated with that filter Physical links The display filter area includes the following filters checkboxes Disabling this filter will hide all physical links between resources on the network map VLANs Only displayed when the VLAN tree is displayed The display filter area includes the following filters checkboxes Disabling this filter will hide the VLAN selected in the VLAN tree on the network map 108 Chapter 14 Power Control This chapter explains how to remotely control the power state of managed resources 14 1 Server Power Control This section explains how to remotely control the power states of physical servers VM hosts and VM guests Use the following procedure to perform power control operations 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the desired server or the physical OS or VM host running on the server or VM guest select Power from the popup menu and select one of the following options ON This option powers on a halted resource and starts its operating system OFF This option powers off an active resource after shutting down its operating system OFF Forced This option forcibly powers off an active resource without first shutting down its operating system Reboot This option restarts an active resource after shutting down its operating system Reboot Forced This option forcibly restarts an active resource without first shutting down its operating system The confirmation dialog is d
192. ical OS and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu The Set Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click lt OK gt The target server is placed into maintenance mode 2 Stop all operations running on the source server When a cloning image is collected the source server is automatically restarted Therefore all operations running on the source server should be stopped before collecting the image Cancel the settings in the following cases NIC redundancy has been configured for admin LANs and public LANs Tagged VLANs have been configured on NICs Note However there is no need to cancel public LAN redundancy settings made via the network parameter auto configuration function The following settings are disabled during cloning image collection which may result in services failing to start on server startup To avoid this automatic startup should be disabled for any service that depends on the following settings Hostname IP address and subnet mask for the admin LAN Default gateway for the admin LAN 006060020000292092090090000000009090999090909000000000909909909909000000090996 Cr When using SUSE Linux Enterprise Server it is necessary to configure the managed server so that only the NIC used for the admin LAN is active when the server is started For details on how to modify the configuration refer to the operating system manual If this procedure is not performed startup of network interface
193. icense configuration file on the source server Note that the structure and location of this file depend on the version of Windows that 1s being used For Windows Server 2003 Installation_folder Agent scw SeparateSetting sysprep sysprep inf Edit the following line to enter a valid product ID ProductID Windows product key Note 5 digit values separated by hyphens p Example eescocoeoooocooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo ProductID 11111 22222 33333 44444 55555 606060606200209209200000009090909090000009090900000900909909900000009090900900000909090099090000900929592000000009900900000909990600909 If there is a mistake in the product ID value or format an error occurs when the collected cloning image is deployed Make sure to enter a valid product ID when editing the definition file 660606000090090900000090909000000090906000009090902000000000909000000009090609090909000009059090000000090900900000009009090999 For Windows Server 2008 Installation_folder Agent scw SeparateSetting ipadj activation dat In the ActivationInfo section set the following parameters using a parameter value syntax Refer to the following table for details on each parameter Table 17 2 Structure of the Definition File Format Parameter Value KMS host search type cmd remotescript KMS l params kmscheck Select one of the following Mandat Mandatory AUTO 125 Automati
194. ied DHCP service for Resource Orchestrator to the OS standard DHCP Service Resource Orchestrator takes exclusive possession of the OS standard DHCP Service Note It is necessary to perform network settings for each admin LAN subnet so that managed servers belonging to subnets other than the admin LAN can communicate with the admin server For details on how to configure the network settings refer to 7 6 Configuring the Network Environment in the Design Guide VE Inaclustered manager configuration when registering an admin LAN subnet for the first time perform Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations 0606020000020909000009099209090000090909099000000000909099000000999099009000090909909009000000909090900900000909909090900000999900900000909299 Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations The following configuration is necessary only when registering an admin LAN subnet for the first time Windows Manager A Information 00606002009092920990900000909990900000909990900000090909290990909000009090999090000009090900000009090909090000009099909900000999099090000099299 When configuring a cluster system in an environment that already has an admin LAN registered perform steps 5 to 10 and 13 1 Allocate the shared disk to the primary node Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Move this service or application to another node 1 Move to node zo
195. iguration Maintenance Mode Places a server into maintenance mode Collect Collects a cloning image from a server Cloning 1 8 Deploy Deploys a cloning image to a server VM Hi Positi Back to Home to Home Migrates a VM guest to VM Home Position a VM guest to VM Home Position External Management o t soft ens external server management software Software 1 9 P VM Management Opens the VM management console installed on the Console 4 7 10 client machine Migrate VM Guest n T9 EE Migrates a VM guest to a different VM host Cannot be selected for a VM guest 2 Available only for VM hosts when using PRIMEQUEST 3 Cannot be selected for PRIMEQUEST 4 This option may or may not be available according to the server virtualization software used For details refer to D 1 Common Functions of Server Virtualization Software in the Design Guide VE 5 Available only for PRIMERGY BX servers 6 Cannot be set for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 7 This menu is not available for a physical OS 8 Cannot be selected for a VM host 9 Available only for PRIMERGY series PRIMEQUEST and SPARC Enterprise M series servers 10 To use this feature a VM management console must be installed and the admin client must be configured properly After installing the VM management console select this menu item and follow the instructions shown in the displayed dialo
196. image is to be deployed By default the physical OS name is entered if the physical OS is registered If the physical OS is not registered the physical server name is entered Windows A string composed of up to 63 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens The string cannot be composed solely of numbers Linux A string composed of up to 64 alphanumeric characters and the following symbols o Ww dno nn qom oon Jn n n on n mon n on 0 233 T73 3 oce mg 3 Note 000900090900000000000000000090090909090900990909099090909009090909090900900909000000900000000000009000999999299999 When using SUSE Linux Enterprise Server it is not possible to configure server names that include periods for the post deployment server names of cloning images m Information 600006000000000000000000000090090999099090990090999209909909909909009009000000000000000000000090009909999299999 Since the entered server name is also used as the hostname of its corresponding destination server it is recommended to use only characters defined in RFC Request For Comments 952 Alphanumeric characters Hyphens Periods Linux 6060600600600600600000000000000000090090909009090909020990990990990990900090900000000000000000000000000000999999999 Release from Maintenance Mode after deployment checkbox Enable this option to automatically release the destination server from maintenance mode after c
197. imilar to a physical view and enables intuitive operation BladeViewer can also be used for state monitoring and operation of resources BMC Baseboard Management Controller A Remote Management Controller used for remote operation of servers boot agent An OS for disk access that is distributed from the manager to managed servers in order to boot them when the network is started during image operations CA Channel Adapter An adapter card that is used as the interface for server HBAs and fibre channel switches and is mounted on storage devices chassis A chassis used to house server blades and partitions Sometimes referred to as an enclosure cloning Creation of a copy of a system disk cloning image A backup of a system disk which does not contain server specific information system node name IP address etc made during cloning When deploying a cloning image to the system disk of another server Resource Orchestrator automatically changes server specific information to that of the target server Cloud Edition The edition which can be used to provide private cloud environments Domain A system that is divided into individual systems using partitioning Also used to indicate a partition DR Option The option that provides the function for remote switchover of servers or storage in order to perform disaster recovery end host mode This is a mode where the uplink port that can communicate with a downlin
198. ine When registering a server on which the agent was installed it is necessary to either reboot the server or restart its related services explained in the 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE after server registration This step has to be done before running any image operation system image backup or cloning image collection For details on how to restart the agent refer to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE 38 7 4 2 Registering LAN Switches Use the following procedure to register LAN switches 1 Discover LAN switches For instructions refer to Discovery 2 Register LAN switches displayed in the network device tree For instructions refer to Registration Discovery 1 From the ROR console menu select Tools Topology Discover LAN switches The Discover LAN Switches dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Start address Enter the start IP address of the network where to discover LAN switches on Enter the IP address using periods Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the network where to discover LAN switches on Enter the IP address using periods Addresses in range Enter the number of addresses to scan for LAN switches Enter a number greater than 1 The maximum number of addresses is determined by the number of hosts allowed by the subnet mask p Example If subnet mask is 255
199. ine Enter a hyphen to skip this line name Enter the name used to identify this VM management software Enter one of the following When using VMware vCenter Server as VM management software vCenterServer When using System Center Virtual Machine Manager as VM management software SCVMM ip address Enter the IP address used to connect to this VM management software or a hyphen Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods If a hyphen is entered this VM management software will be seen as being installed on the admin server 204 product Enter the name of this VM management software Enter one of the following When using VMware vCenter Server as VM management software vmware vc When using System Center Virtual Machine Manager as VM management software ms scvmm login_name Enter the name of the user account set for this VM management software Use a string of up to 84 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes from 0x21 to 0x7e When specifying a domain use the following syntax domain namewuser name login_passwd Enter the password for this VM management software Use a string of up to 128 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes from 0x21 to Ox7e passwd_enc Enter one of the following If login_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted Server Agent Management Information Section Name Enter
200. ing both entries with and without redundancy settings should start with 0 and increase incrementally 138 When there is a mixture of interfaces with and without redundancy assign values in ascending order to the interfaces without redundancy as well Interface entries with redundancy settings are only activated with Linux With Windows these interface entries will be ignored Table 17 5 Interface Entry Settings with Redundanc PRIMECLUSTER GLS virtual interface name o IP address in m adress specified VIF_IPAD XXX XXX XXX XXX for virtual interface format Subnet mask in VIF_MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX format Interface name PRI NAME E Interface name D NAME B Subnet mask Name of primary interface Name of secondary interface IP address of monitored destination IP address in POL ADDR XXX XXX XXX XXX format PAT NAME POL HUBS ON OFF Refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual for details on each setting Virtual interface name for standby patrol Hub to hub monitoring ON OFF 139 Xis an integer between 0 and 255 X is an integer equal to or greater than 0 This setting specifies the primary interface name when a pair of interface names exists Example eth2 Y is an integer equal to or greater than 0 This setting specifies the secondary interface name when a pair of interface names exists Example eth3 Up to two IP addresses can be specified separated by a comm
201. ing events No warning or error level events have occurred on the displayed resources This indicates a warning state Warning event detected This indicates an error state Error event detected An error level event has occurred on one or more of the displayed resources Resource Status Area This area displays the number of registered servers experiencing each status Yellow A warning level event has occurred on one or more of the displayed resources No action is necessary Click the status monitoring area to stop the blinking and fix the cause of the problem Click the status monitoring area to stop the blinking and fix the cause of the problem The resource status area lights up when there is at least one server in either Error or Warning status Clicking a lit up status area will display a list of resources with that status in the Resource List tab Double click a displayed resource to switch to its Resource Details tab and open either its external management software or the Management Blade s Web interface to investigate the problem A 4 Tree Panel This section describes the trees used in the ROR console 164 Figure A 4 Tree Panel Serer Resource i gUSerner Resources filiexeo0 Cevcesevececesvecd H O f BXo00 E BX900 2 Bx900 3 t EI BX900 4 Unregistered t B BX900 5 Unregistered E BX200 5 T B BX900 7 t Bx900 8 t B BX900 9 B BX900 10 t B
202. ing that configuration file The actual re configuration is then performed as a single import operation Re use of Existing Configurations Once a system has been fully setup its configuration can be exported and re used as a basis for the design of other systems This makes it easy to design various systems located in different sites Figure 12 1 Examples of Use Office Server room Download 1 Contact Fujitsu technical staff 1 Contact Fujitsu technical staff 3 2 Design J m 2 Design v Sle System System System System configuration configuration configuration Admin client configuration template Excel file CSV template Excel file CSV Manager 5 CheckiSave _ a i Check Reuse F Data transfer System configuration file CSV System configuration file CSV Only system configuration files in CSV format can be imported or exported For details on the system configuration file s format refer to Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files Resource Orchestrator provides a sample in CSV format To obtain a copy of the Excel template hereafter system configuration template please contact Fujitsu technical staff This system configuration template makes it easy to create system configuration files in CSV format When loading a system configuration template from a CSV file or importing a system configuration file from the ROR console Use the format described in B 2 File Format for the system configuratio
203. ing to the instructions given in 5 8 rexadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE Because image files are actually copied over to the new location this step may take some time to complete Run the rcxadm imagemgr command from either node of the cluster resource The new location should be a folder on the shared disk 3 Restore registry replication settings Restore the registry key deleted in step 1 to the registry replication settings of the Deployment Service resource Use the following procedure to restore the registry key a Inthe Failover Cluster Management window right click the Deployment Service resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The Deployment Service Properties window is displayed b Click Add on the Registry Replication tab The Registry Key window will be displayed c Configure the above registry key in Root registry key d Click OK e After configuration of the registry keys is complete click Apply f Click OK to close the dialog Linux Manager 1 Mount the shared disk on the primary node Log in to the primary node with OS administrator privileges and mount the admin server s shared disk 2 Change the location of the image file storage directory Change the location of the image file storage directory according to the instructions given in 5 8 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE Because
204. inux Enterprise Server 11 Service Pack1 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 Service Pack1 for EM64T Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 4 for x86 32 Bit Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 4 for x86 64 64 Bit Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 5 for x86 32 Bit Oracle Enterprise Linux Release 5 Update 5 for x86 64 64 Bit Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS v 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES v 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS v 4 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES v 4 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 5 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 5 for EM64T Red Hat Enterprise Linux Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 6 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 6 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 7 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 7 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 8 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 8 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enter
205. ion Tools A 2 1 List of Menus The menus provided on the menu bar of the ROR console are listed in the table below Options available vary according to the authority level of the user account Table A 1 Menu Items ius ed o for pre configuration for pre configuration i Downloads a sample of the system configuration file CSV format for pre configuration Exports environmental data collected from chassis Exports environmental data collected from servers Exports environmental data collected from power monitoring devices Logs out of the ROR console 1 Download Template CSV Format Export Environmental Server Data Power Monitoring Devices a 155 Privileged User Reset Layout Betas n layout of the ROR console to its initial state Registers a chassis Registers a server Registers a SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series server Registers SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Registers a PRIMEQUEST Registers a LAN switch Register the agent Registers a power monitoring device Server SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series SPARC Enterprise Partition Model PRIMEQUEST L LAN switch a Register Power Monitoring Device Management Software vCenter Server Management Software SCVMM Management Software VIOM Settings D Registration Settings HBA address rename settings 3 Network Settings 4 5 Spare Server Modify 2 e i S
206. ion configure the new WWN information after deleting Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity in the currently configured WWN information 83 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target physical server and select Modify WWN Settings from the popup menu The WWN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined HBA ports Select the following values according to the system configuration Procedures for Single path Configurations Specify 1 for HBA ports Procedures for Multi path Configurations Select the number of multi paths for HBA ports However it is necessary to select 1 during installation of the operating system Select the number of paths and reconfigure HBA address rename settings after setting up the multi path driver Portn WWPN Enter or select the WWPN of an HBA collected from physical servers When using a multi path configuration enter the values of the HBAs and the corresponding CAs of servers in the same order based on the values in 6 1 6 Settings when Switching Over SPARC Enterprise Servers in the Design Guide VE Target CA Select WWPNs of storage CA and AffinityGroup on Select hyphens to keep spare servers inactive Also select a hyphen when deleting Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity in the configured WWN information When using a server on which an agent is
207. ion refer to Message number 61142 in Messages Aserver running a VM host can still be registered as a physical OS if its Server OS category is set to Windows Linux For Windows Server 2008 etc A VM host server that was mistakenly registered as a physical OS should be deleted and re registered as a VM host The same NIC cannot be selected for Admin LAN MAC address 1 and Admin LAN MAC address 2 For the following cases after selecting Disable MAC address 2 for Admin LAN MAC address 2 the lowest numbered NIC which is not used for Admin LAN MAC address 1 is used for Admin LAN2 When using the HBA address rename setup service When performing admin LAN redundancy 3 Click OK The registered server will be displayed in the server resource tree amp Note When an agent is registered on a VM host all VM guests running on that VM host are also registered automatically Whenever a VM guest is created modified deleted or moved on a registered VM host the changes are automatically updated in the server resource tree The VM guest name displayed in the ROR console is either the VM name defined in its server virtualization software or the host name defined in the guest OS The timing at which the host name of a guest OS is detected and displayed varies according its server virtualization software For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE It
208. ion for the storage management software is modified 9 8 2 Changing Storage Unit Basic Information This section explains how to change the basic information of storage units The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to change the basic information of storage units 80 1 In the ROR console storage tree right click the target storage unit and select Modify Registration Settings from the displayed menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click OK Basic information for the storage unit is modified 9 8 3 Changing Virtual Storage Resource Basic Information This section explains how to change the basic settings of virtual storage resources The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to modify the basic information for virtual storage resources 1 In the ROR console storage tree right click the target virtual storage resource and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click OK The basic information of
209. ired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section 203 spare server Enter the physical server name of a server to be assigned as a spare server n To specify multiple spare servers separate each server name using semicolons To remove current spare server settings enter DELETE vlan switch optional Specify whether VLAN settings or port group settings should be automatically transferred to the spare server when a server switchover occurs Enter ON OFF or a hyphen auto switch optional This value defines whether or not to trigger an automatic switchover upon detection of a server failure Enter ON OFF ora hyphen boot_type Enter the boot type of the server Enter one of the following SAN boot SAN For local boot local When using the VIOM server profile to conduct boot settings Hyphens spare server force off Enter whether the spare server is turned off forcibly when switching over to the spare server Enter ON OFF or a hyphen 7 spare server with vm guest Enter whether the server is switched to a VM host on which a VM guest exists Enter ON OFF or a hyphen VM Management Software Information Section Name Enter VMManager as the section name Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current l
210. is displayed The error dialog provides detailed information of events Events can be filtered using the checkboxes displayed in the window Selecting a checkbox will show the events whose status corresponds to that of the selected checkbox Clearing a checkbox will hide such events When Filter is clicked in the window the Filter Settings dialog is displayed The following conditions can be set for the events displayed in the list Event Log Date The conditions set for events are displayed above the list To clear the conditions click x displayed on the right of the list Clicking a column heading will change the color of the selected column and sort events in either ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to specify the page to display move forwards and backwards by single pages and move to the first or last page amp Note When a resource s status becomes fatal its related event shows an Error status in the Status column For this reason the actual status of a resource should be confirmed from either the resource tree or the Resource List tab 000000090900900090090992909900000009090909090900009090099900000009024909909099090009909099090000090990099090990990900090999090000000099209090000099299 A Information For the SPARC Enterprise T series the following levels are displayed for SEVERITY values of hardware SNMP Trap MIBs SUN HW TRAP MIB mib
211. is recommended not to use duplicate names for physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests If duplicated names are used those resources cannot be managed from the command line When registering a server on which the agent was installed it is necessary to either reboot the server or restart its related services explained in the 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE after server registration This step has to be done before running any image operation system image backup or cloning image collection For details on how to restart the agent refer to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE 7 3 3 Registering LAN Switch Blades To register a LAN switch blade its enclosing chassis must be registered first Use the following procedure to register a LAN switch blade 231 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click an unregistered LAN switch blade from the target chassis and select Register LAN Switch from the popup menu The Register LAN Switch dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined LAN switch name Enter the name to assign to this LAN switch blade Enter up to 15 characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the admin LAN IP address that was set on this LAN switch blade on Enter the IP address using periods User ID Ente
212. isplayed 2 Click OK The specified power control operation is executed 3 The progress of the specified operation is displayed in the Recent Operations area Check that the operation status is shown as Completed and that the resource in the server resource tree or Resource List tab has changed to the expected power state A Information A reboot or forced reboot of a physical server or VM host is done by shutting down the server once and powering it on again instead of a system reset CC Note VM guests must be properly configured in order to use the power off or reboot options Attempting to shut down or reboot a VM guest that is not properly configured will result in an error For details refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE Depending on the server virtualization environment a VM guest may automatically migrate to another VM host when a power control operation is performed This may cause power control operations to fail and return an error when used on VM guests For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE A VM guest can be configured to automatically start or stop whenever its VM host starts up or shuts down This can be achieved by configuring the VM guest s startup and shutdown options in the server virtualization software used For details refer to the server virtualization software manual Take caution regarding the followin
213. istry keys and click lt Remove gt The selected key is removed from Root Registry Key When deleting the second registry key repeat step b c Click lt Apply gt The settings are applied d Click lt OK gt to close the dialog Take the following services of the Services and Applications for the manager offline Deployment Service TFTP Service PXE Services Register the admin LAN subnet On the primary node bring the shared disk of the manger online and take all other cluster resources offline Open Services from Administrative Tools on the Windows Control Panel and then configure the startup type of DHCP Server service as Manual on the Services window From the Services window stop the DHCP Server service Using Explorer copy the following folder from the local disk of the primary node to the folder on the shared disk Local Disk Source Shared Disk Target SystemRoot System32 dhcp Drive_name Fujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp 50 p Example When the OS has been installed on the C drive it is SystemRoot C Windows 060606062006200090092909090000000000099900000000009090909009090209090000000090900990990000000000099909090900000000090999299 9 Configure access rights for the folder for the DHCP Server that was copied to the shared disk Execute the following command using the command prompt of the primary node cacls Drive_name Fujitsu ROR SVROR dhcp T P NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM F
214. k port is fixed at one and communication between uplink ports is blocked 214 environmental data Measured data regarding the external environments of servers managed using Resource Orchestrator Measured data includes power data collected from power monitoring targets ESC ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Software that supports stable operation of multi vendor storage system environments involving SAN DAS or NAS Provides configuration management relation management trouble management and performance management functions to integrate storage related resources such as ETERNUS Express The edition which provides server registration monitoring and visualization external FTP server An FTP server used to relay network device files between the ROR manager and network devices that do not possess their own FTP server function FC switch Fibre Channel Switch A switch that connects Fibre Channel interfaces and storage devices fibre channel switch blade A fibre channel switch mounted in the chassis of a blade server global zone The actual OS that is used for a Solaris container A Solaris environment that has been installed on a physical server GLS Global Link Services Fujitsu network control software that enables high availability networks through the redundancy of network transmission channels GSPB Giga LAN SAS and PCI Box Interface Board A board which mounts onboard I O for two partitions and a PCIe PCI Ex
215. l command Refer to the server virtualization software manual or to 3 2 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command VE for details Depending on the server virtualization software used some restrictions may apply to the use of VM maintenance mode settings For details about such restrictions refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE 14 2 Chassis Power Control This section explains how to remotely control the power state of a chassis Power operations are only possible for PRIMERGY BX server chassis The power state of a blade chassis can be controlled using the rcxadm chassis command For details refer to 3 1 rcxadm chassis in the Reference Guide Command VE 110 Chapter 15 Control of VM Environments This chapter explains the Resource Orchestrator functions that are specific to VM guests and VM hosts Some functions may or may not be available depending on the server virtualization software used Refer to D 1 Common Functions of Server Virtualization Software in the Design Guide VE for details Other functions are similar in use to those available for regular physical OSs without server virtualization software 15 1 Migration of VM Guests between Servers This section explains how to migrate a VM guest to a VM host on a different physical server Two methods of VM guest migration are available in Resource Orchestrator Although such methods are named differently depending on
216. ladeViewer BladeViewer provides an intuitive representation of blade servers and their statuses This makes it easier to monitor resource states or perform basic operations on blade servers Figure 6 1 BladeViewer i A y io Update 2009 06 29 16 13 59 0 2 8 0 Total 10 d 8 LJ 19 JEO e Oeon E TT Hee Bem 2 m12 BladeViewer allows the following operations Monitoring of resource statuses The statuses of chassis servers LAN switches and physical OSs can be monitored from a view representative of the actual placement and configuration of physical devices When using virtual servers BladeViewer shows a list of VM guests for each VM host This helps keeping track of relationships between VM guests and VM hosts BladeViewer also makes it easy to confirm which operating systems physical OS and guest OS are affected by a hardware failure Display and control of power status The power status of each server blade storage blade and VM guest is represented by an intuitive power button Clicking this button provides quick access to power control operations for both server blades and VM guests Display of custom labels and comments BladeViewer allows users to define custom labels and comments for each physical OS VM host and VM guest Once defined labels are shown on top of each displayed physical OS VM host and VM guest Using labels to display application contents makes it easy to visualize what
217. lecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs Explains how to export the power consumption data collected from registered power monitoring targets and how to display it as graphs and also describes the exported data s format Appendix A User Interface Provides an overview of the ROR console GUI Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files Explains the format of the CSV system configuration files used by Resource Orchestrator s pre configuration function Appendix C Maintenance Mode Explains the maintenance mode available in Resource Orchestrator and how to use it Glossary Explains the terms used in this manual Please refer to it when necessary Notational Conventions The notation in this manual conforms to the following conventions When using Resource Orchestrator and the functions necessary differ due to the necessary basic software OS it is indicated as follows Windows Manager Sections related to Windows manager Linux Manager Sections related to Linux manager Windows Sections related to Windows When not using Hyper V Linux Sections related to Linux li KVM Sections related to RHEL KVM Solaris Containers Sections related to Solaris containers Physical Servers Sections related to physical servers VM host Sections related to VMware Windows Server 2008 with Hyper V enabled os Xen RHEL KVM and Solaris containers Unless specified otherwise the blade servers mentioned in this man
218. leted If necessary re collect system images and cloning images Related Services Use the following procedure to change the port numbers used for the related services However the port numbers of the DHCP server and the dhcpd service cannot be changed Windows Manager 1 Change the port numbers a Open the Windows Registry Editor and search for the following subkey When using a 32 bit version of Windows Key name HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard CLONE When using a 64 bit version of Windows Key name HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu SystemcastWizard CLONE b Select PortBase from the registry entries under this subkey 61 c From the menu select Edit Modify The Edit DWORD Value dialog is displayed d Select Decimal and click OK This port value will define the first port of the range used by deployment services However because the related services can use up to 16 port numbers ensure that all ports included between PortBase defined here and PortBase 15 do not conflict with any other applications or services Moreover be sure to set a value lower than 65519 for PortBase so that the highest port number PortBase 15 does not exceed the largest valid port number 65534 In a clustered manager configuration change port numbers on both the primary and secondary node 2 Restart the server on which the port number has been changed Linux Manager 1 Change th
219. ll not be available for the admin server but its hardware status and properties will be displayed in the ROR console 7 5 2 Registering PRIMEQUEST Servers For details on PRIMEQUEST server registration refer to 7 3 2 Registering Blade Servers 7 6 When using SPARC Enterprise Servers This section explains how to register resources when using SPARC Enterprise servers Registering SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Servers Registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Servers 7 6 1 Registering SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Servers By registering a chassis every partition mounted in the chassis will be automatically detected and displayed as an unregistered server in the server resource tree Register these managed servers individually For details on registering managed servers refer to 7 6 2 Registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Servers Use the following procedure to register a chassis 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register SPARC Enterprise Partition Model from the popup menu The Register Chassis dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address of the XSCF of the target chassis on Enter the IP address using periods Chassis name Enter a name to assign to this chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and con
220. loning image deployment If this option disabled maintenance mode should be released manually after collecting the cloning image 131 c Click OK The cloning image deployment process starts The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process 0006060006006000000000000000000000009090920990059095209909099092099009000900000000000000000000000000909209299299999 Please note that canceling the deployment of a cloning image does not restore the destination server to the state before the deployment took place Deploying a cloning image to multiple destination servers a In the ROR console select the Image List tab A list of cloning images is displayed under the cloning image list b Right click the cloning image to deploy and select Deploy from the popup menu The Deploy a Cloning Image dialog is displayed A server that can be deployed is displayed C Check the checkbox of the server to deploy a cloning image to and set the following items Release from Maintenance Mode after deployment checkbox Enable this option to automatically release the destination server from maintenance mode after cloning image deployment If this option disabled maintenance mode should be released manually after collecting the cloning image The Server Name column displays the names of each destination server
221. luding alphanumeric characters blank spaces and symbols 3 Click OK The registered server will be displayed in the server resource tree amp Note 00602020090992990900009090999099909000090909909089090000090909909000009090990990909000099099090990900000090909990990909000999990920000909999090000909999 After registering the server please verify that the information registered for the remote management controller is correct This can be verified by trying out power operations from Resource Orchestrator against that server Refer to Chapter 14 Power Control for power operations 7 7 Registering Power Monitoring Devices This section explains how to register power monitoring devices Registering power monitoring devices PDU or UPS enables monitoring of power consumption Use the following procedure to register power monitoring devices 1 Inthe ROR console power monitoring device tree right click Power Monitoring Devices and select Register Power Monitoring Device from the popup menu The Register Power Monitoring Device dialog is displayed 47 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Device name Enter a name to assign to this power monitoring device When exporting power consumption data use this name to select power monitoring devices for which to export data Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and
222. mation is added Editing Information This section explains how to edit information Perform the following procedure to edit information a Select the information to edit from the list b Click Edit The Edit entry dialog is displayed C Set the following items Schedule There is no specified format When not displaying the date leave this field blank Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters or symbols Commas cannot be used Messages Enter up to 250 alphanumeric characters or symbols d Click OK The information is updated Moving Information This section explains how to move information in the list Perform the following procedure to move information a Select the information to move from the list b Click Move up or Move down The selected information is moved up or down one line Deleting Information This section explains how to delete information Perform the following procedure to delete information a Select the information to delete from the list b Click Delete The Delete entry dialog is displayed c Click Yes The selected information is deleted 3 Click Save to save the changes after operations have been completed Click Cancel to discard the changes and return to the Information window Point These messages can be used to inform all users of contact and enquiry information Chapter 3 Resource Management Overview This chapter provides an overview of the two views available on the
223. me Restore the system images backed up before cloning image deployment If the destination server is different from the source server Run the rcxadm lanctl unset command described in 17 6 3 Clearing Settings to reset network settings to their original values If the admin LAN IP address is not set on the source server set it manually to restore communications between the admin server and the source server Re collect the cloning image Correct any errors found in the definition file for the network parameter auto configuration function and re collect the cloning image Re deploy the cloning image to the destination servers for which deployment failed Delete any cloning image that failed to deploy If Windows Server 2008 activation failed during deployment message number 47233 is displayed This message indicates that deployment of Windows Server 2008 completed but that activation failed For details on the appropriate corrective action refer to Message number 47233 in Messages When a cloning image is deployed to multiple servers it may be necessary to enable IGMP snooping on admin LAN switches If IGMP snooping is not enabled transfer performance may deteriorate when ports with different speeds co exist in the same network or multiple image operations are run simultaneously 17 4 Viewing This section explains how to display collected cloning images In the ROR console select the Image List tab A list of cloning im
224. modification has been performed The information below is not copied when the cloning image is collected from the managed server and will be automatically reconfigured when the cloning image is deployed This enables a single cloning image to be deployed to different servers Hostname P address and subnet mask for the admin LAN Default gateway for the admin LAN Settings other than the above such as those for applications and middleware are not automatically reconfigured please set them manually before and after the cloning operation when necessary The public LAN settings IP address and redundancy settings for servers to which the cloning image is deployed can be configured easily by using the network parameter auto configuration function For details on the network parameter auto configuration function refer to 17 6 Network Parameter Auto Configuration for Cloning Images Cloning cannot be performed for Linux managed servers on which iSCSI disks have been configured amp Note When using ServerView Deployment Manager on the admin LAN this function is disabled Use the cloning function of ServerView Deployment Manager For details refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE When using server cloning regardless of the boot environment local SAN iSCSI or RAID configurations only content from the boot disk first disk recognized by the BIOS on managed servers is act
225. mp Note 0060606000009090909909000000090909090990909000000000909090905090900000000000909090999909900000000900990909090000000000092999 or colons XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX This field can be omitted in the following cases When not using the HBA address rename setup service When not using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the managed server For a spare server whose primary servers are not using admin LAN redundancy The second mac address header is the equivalent of the hbaar mac address header defined in RCXCSV V3 0 hbaar mac address can only be used when RCXCSV V3 0 is specified at the top of the imported system configuration file However this header is automatically changed to second mac address when exporting a new system configuration file snmp community name Enter the name of the SNMP community read permission assigned to this server Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens amp Note This field is not necessary when using servers other than the PRIMERGY series ipmi ip address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources ipmi user name Enter the name of a remote management controller user account with administrative privileges Enter a string of up to 16 alphanumeric cha
226. n a configuration with a local boot environment execute the following command on all servers that have been set as spare servers Ina SAN data environment using a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN Linux Manager i opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN When using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server management software ServerView is selected Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJS Vrevmr bin rexadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename and the following model PRIMERGY BX960 S1 Windows Manager Installation foldeNSVRORMManagerWinWcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVrcevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Point The conditions specified in 9 3 Server Switchover Conditions in the Setup Guide VE must be satisfied for server switcho
227. n affecting each physical and virtual server A See For details on the Network Map refer to Chapter 13 Network Map A 10 Recent Operations This section describes the recent operations area of the ROR console Figure A 6 Recent Operations Recent Operations LA Operation Started Status Server Power OFF 2012 05 02 19 07 22 2012 05 02 19 07 52 Completed 2 BX600 Ian3 LAN Switch Reaistration 2012 05 02 19 06 35 2012 05 02 19 08 38 Completed BX900 8 Server Power ON 2012 05 22 18 05 26 2012 05 02 18 05 57 Completed m if The recent operations area shows the status of operations that were recently performed The result of a completed operation shows the operation s completion time and the related resource name For operations that are still running a progress bar is shown to indicate the current progress state Each operation displayed in the recent operation area provides the following information Information Displayed in the Recent Operations Area Operation The executed operation and the target resource name are displayed The process name is displayed while the process is being executed 182 Started The date and time at which the operation was started is displayed Status The status of the executed operation is displayed The date and time at which the process was completed is displayed IE Point When an operation is executed in a tab other than the Resource tab e g the L
228. n file 90 When saving a file in CSV format from the system configuration template or exporting a system configuration file from the ROR console Export will be performed using the latest file format given in B 2 File Format The following operations usually performed from the ROR console can be equally performed using the pre configuration function Registration 7 1 Registering VIOM Coordination 7 3 When using Blade Servers 7 4 2 Registering LAN Switches 7 2 Registering VM Management Software 7 7 Registering Power Monitoring Devices 1 7 8 Registering Admin LAN Subnets 7 3 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches 7 4 3 HBA address rename Settings 2 Chapter 8 Configuring Monitoring Information in the Setup Guide VE Chapter 18 Server Switchover Settings Modification 8 1 Changing Admin IP Addresses 3 9 1 11 Changing Admin LAN Subnets 9 1 2 Changing Server Names 9 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses 3 9 1 4 Changing SNMP Communities 9 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings 9 1 7 Changing VM Host Login Account Information 9 1 8 Changing the VLAN Settings of LAN Switch Blades 9 1 9 Changing HBA address rename Settings 2 9 1 10 Changing Boot Options 9 3 Changing VIOM Registration Settings 9 4 Changing LAN Switch Settings 9 5 Changing VM Management Software Settings 9 6 Changing Power Monitoring Environment Setting
229. n is unavailable the following features are also unavailable Registration of LAN switch blades Changing of LAN switch blade settings Changing and setting the VLAN for LAN switch blades internal and external connection ports Restoration of LAN switch blades Server switchover changing network settings while a server is switched over SSH connection SSH version 2 can be selected for the following LAN switch blades LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 1 00 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 4 16 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 3 12 or later version 32 LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 3 12 or later version 7 3 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches On managed LAN switch blades VLANs should be set on both internal ports those connected to network interfaces on managed servers and external ports those connected to external adjacent LAN switches Note VLANS cannot be configured on PRIMERGY BX 900 and BX 400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode Ce 7 3 5 Configuring VLANs on External Ports Use the following procedure to configure VLANs on a LAN switch blade s external ports 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings mus
230. n the settings then click lt OK gt 84 If the target CA is not displayed confirm the status of the following settings ESC is correctly registered on Resource Orchestrator Fibre Channel switches and storage units are correctly registered Only one access path is configured on ESC for each CA of an HBA 10 2 Deploying Cloning Images For the second and subsequent servers operating systems are created using the cloning image collected from the first server For details on cloning refer to Chapter 17 Cloning Physical Servers 85 Chapter 11 Deleting Resources This chapter explains how to delete resources It is possible to register and delete a managed server and LAN switch as a single resource when they are in the same chassis Note that operation of a server cannot be performed while the LAN switch is being registered and removed If the operation is performed simultaneously for multiple resources one of the following messages is displayed In this case wait until the current operation is completed before executing the desired operation again FJSVrcx ERROR 67210 LAN switch name LAN switch is busy FJSVrcx ERROR 67210 Managed server name physical server is busy 11 1 Deleting Chassis This section explains how to delete chassis Use the following procedure to delete the chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Delete from the popup menu The
231. nd number of units Meaning Server and number of units Note Nis the number of servers Table 6 3 Status Icons None The resource can be used normally Warni An error occurred however the resource can be used arning Alternatively the status of some resources cannot be obtained A fault or error occurred therefore the resource cannot be used The resource is stopped therefore it cannot be used 6 3 2 Chassis Panel The chassis panel displays the statuses of each registered chassis 12 Table 6 4 Chassis Icon Chassis wA See 606060606200000000000009000000090909090900000009099909090000090999000000909099090900000090900909090000009009900000099090690900006099299 For details on the different chassis statuses refer to Table 6 3 Status Icons of 6 3 1 Status Panel If a chassis icon shows a warning or error status it means that a problem occurred in a resource contained in the chassis For details on how to identify faulty resources refer to 6 3 3 Blade Panel A Information Selecting a chassis icon from the chassis panel displays the contents of that chassis in the blade panel For details refer to 6 3 3 Blade Panel 6 3 3 Blade Panel The blade panel displays the statuses of all the resources inserted into the selected chassis Those resources are shown in a format representative of their physical configuration shape and position To display the contents of a specific chassis in the blad
232. ndix C Maintenance Mode This appendix explains the maintenance mode available in Resource Orchestrator and how to use it Maintenance mode is used during hardware maintenance of managed servers It is also used during the installation and maintenance of physical OSs and VM hosts Maintenance mode avoids unwanted error notifications and disables execution of Auto Recovery upon server failure The following operations can be performed on a server that has been placed into maintenance mode Maintenance LED Maintenance LEDs can be controlled Backup and restore System images can be backed up and restored Cloning Cloning images can be collected and deployed Use the following procedures to set and release maintenance mode Setting Maintenance Mode In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu Releasing Maintenance Mode In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu Note When using ServerView Deployment Manager depending on the operation servers may be rebooted or temporarily shut down This also affects servers managed using Resource Orchestrator Itis recommended to place affected servers into maintenance mode before running operations from ServerView Deployment Manager Then the maintenance m
233. ndows 2003 x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Wind 7 Windows R 7 Professional indows Windows R 7 Ultimate Windows Vista R Business Windows Vista Windows Vista R Enterprise Windows Vista R Ultimate Windows XP Microsoft R Windows R XP Professional operating system Windows PE Microsoft R Windows R Preinstallation Environment Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS v 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES v 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS v 4 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES v 4 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 5 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 5 for EM64T Linux Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 6 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 6 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 7 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 7 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 8 for x86 iv Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R AS 4 8 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R ES 4 8 for EM64T Red H
234. nds Registration and deletion of ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser integration Make sure that less than 200 resources are specified for registration or changing in the system configuration file specified for import If itis necessary to specify more than 200 resources for registration or changing do by importing multiple system configuration files Whenusing ServerView Deployment Manager on the admin LAN the following settings cannot be defined using the pre configuration function For details on co existence with ServerView Deployment Manager refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE Spare server settings using the backup and restore or HBA address rename method HBA address rename Settings 12 2 Importing the System Configuration File This section explains how to import a system configuration definition file saved in CSV format from the ROR console Use the following procedure to import a system configuration definition file Prepare a system configuration file in CSV format Point 00606206000606029290909090990900000090900999990990000009000909290990990909090000000900999090909999000 000000090990900000000009299299 System configuration templates in Excel format cannot be directly imported into Resource Orchestrator Use the template s save to CSV function to produce a system configuration file in CSV format before importing Only system configuration files conf
235. ne of the following for the Web browser pop up blocker Disable the pop up blocker Add the URL of the ROR Console to the Address of web site to allow setting Check with the system administrator for the URL of the ROR Console Surrogate pair characters cannot be used on the ROR Console When opening the ROR console right after launching a Web browser a warning window concerning the site s security certificate will be displayed With Internet Explorer 8 or 9 the following message is displayed There is a problem with this web site s security certificate This warns the user that Resource Orchestrator uses a self signed certificate to encrypt its HTTPS SSL communication with the Web browser Resource Orchestrator generates a unique self signed certificate for each admin server during manager installation Within a firewall protected intranet a network where the risk of identity theft is low or where all correspondents are trusted there is no risk in using self signature certificates for communications Accept the warning to display the Resource Orchestrator login screen With Internet Explorer 8 or 9 the login screen can be displayed by selecting the following option Continue to this web site not recommended When connecting to the manager from Internet Explorer 8 or 9 the background of the address bar will become red and the words Certificate Error will be displayed on the right side of the address bar of the login screen the
236. ng overall maps and local maps and when updating networks automatically at one minute intervals When updating the network map automatically drawing operations cannot be accepted When stopping the automatic update after once displaying the network map network link operations are possible without being affected by drawing operations The automatic update configurations are recorded in the browser and taken over when login is performed again Note As a guide it takes about 1 to 10 minutes to draw in environments with 100 to 1 500 physical virtual servers This changes depending on the workload of the admin server or admin client wA See 606060620606200090906090900009099090099000009099090900000900909929209909000090909090909090900009009099090000009099090000000909909909000000099909000600099299 For details on resource icons refer to 13 4 Resource Icons For details on link statuses refer to 13 5 Network Links Operations of the ROR console may not be able to be executed when updating the network map automatically Stop automatic update by clearing the Automatic Updates checkbox and then operations of the ROR console will be able to be executed during updating of the network map In order to update the network map to show the latest status click the update button 0060606060009000602060060600090060990000900060909090000090909000909000090909909909000000090990900000092909909900060600099290900060009000060c60c00c0969299
237. ngs Restore the registry key deleted in step 1 to the registry replication settings of the PXE Services resource Use the following procedure to restore the registry key a Inthe Failover Cluster Management window right click the PXE Services resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The PXE Services Properties window will be displayed 57 b Click Add on the Registry Replication tab The Registry Key window will be displayed c Configure the above registry key in Root registry key d Click OK e After configuration of the registry keys is complete click Apply f Click OK to close the dialog 4 Assign the manager s shared disk and IP address to the secondary node Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Move this service or application to another node 1 Move to node rode name from the displayed menu The name of the secondary node is displayed for node name Change the manager IP address on the secondary node On the secondary node use the rexadm mgrctl modify command to set the new IP address Use the same IP address as the one set in step 2 Assign the manager s shared disk and IP address to the primary node Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Move this service or application to another no
238. ngs Modifies a chassis registration settings External M t Nee VIAE Opens a Management Blade s Web interface a Expor Environmental Data Exports environmental data collected from chassis Note This option is only available for chassis equipped with power monitoring capabilities Table A 4 Popup Menus Available for Servers Popup Menu Function Register e emm 158 Popup Menu Fee mmm a 1 Places a server into maintenance mode Maintenance Mode Release Sets a server to active mode OFF Powers off a server after shutting down its operating system OFF Forced ae off a server without shutting down its operating system Reboots a server after shutting down its operatin Reboot 8 P e system Reboots a server without shutting down its operatin Reboot Forced 8 P e Dm Turns the maintenance LED on the maintenance LED on LED 3 Hardware Detects and re configures the properties of a replaced Re configure o server Backup Restore Restores a system image to a server Deploy Deploys a cloning image to a server Console Screen 5 i TJ Opens the server console External Management Opens external server management software Software e Enen 7 Environmental Data Exports environmental data collected from servers Available only for PRIMERGY BX series and PRIMEQUEST servers 2 Available only for VM hosts when using PRIMEQUEST 3 Available only for
239. nit Configuration Settings Chassis Use the following procedure to change the IP address of a chassis 1 2 Change the IP address of the management blade In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed Change Admin LAN IP address Click OK The chassis admin IP address is changed Managed Servers Use the following procedure to change the IP address of a managed server However it is still required when using the same address for both the admin and public IP address This procedure is not required when changing only the public IP address of a server 1 2 Log in to the managed server with an OS administrator account Change the IP address set within the operating system Change the IP address according to the OS manual If the admin LAN has been made redundant change the admin IP address set in the following tools or products Refer to the manual of each product for usage details Windows PRIMECLUSTER GLS BACS Intel PROSet Linux Solaris PRIMECLUSTER GLS NIC switching mode Physical IP address takeover function amp Note When BladeLogic is being used for server management software remove the managed servers that have been added to BladeLogic and add them again When adding managed servers specify their admin IP address 00606060009099
240. not enter any comments between the section name and section header e0060606002090090606000009009006900000299 090606009209290909000000090990090000099009090000009050000000009299000000009920009956 Operation Column This describes the operation type for the resource The following characters can be used in the operation column new Register 188 change Modification Hyphens Do nothing Parameter This describes the parameter value to be set Note 0606060066020920099090000600900909090000909090900990009090920900000090909000909000009099090900000000209090000090000909000600909999996 The order of operation and parameter columns should follow the order defined in section header under B 3 Resource Definitions Allowed Characters For details on the characters allowed for each resource definition refer to B 3 Resource Definitions Optional parameters can be omitted by using hyphens However hyphens are seen as valid characters for user names passwords and SNMP communities Note that if extra commas are added to the end of a line those will be simply ignored without errors Backslashes and double quotations will be displayed differently in the ROR console from how they appear in the system configuration file Refer to the following table for details on such differences Table B 1 Differences between System Configuration Files Contents and Display in the ROR Console Co
241. nt software ServerView is selected Windows Manager Installation foldeNSVRORMManagerWinWcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Linux Manager vlopt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename and the following model or OS PRIMERGY BX960 S1 XenServer6 or later Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJS Vrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN 120 16 4 Viewing This section explains how to browse and view existing system image backups System images can also be listed using commands Refer to Chapter 4 Image Operations in the Reference Guide Command VE for details In the ROR console select the Image List tab The System Image List is displayed Figure 16 1 System Image List System Image List lt lt lt 11 1 gt gt gt Server Name Version Backup Date Comments D EE EN 2010 05 07 11 34 00 Se 2 2010 05 07 20 58 00 ae ae ERTE 2010 05 07 11 34 00 Refer to A 8 Image List Tab for details on the System Image List To view the most recent system image backup of a managed server select a server OS from the server resource tree and click the Resource Details tab The latest sy
242. ntent of a System Configuration File CSV Display in the ROR Console n Note The whole value must be enclosed by double quotations p Example CSV Content a nb n Display in the ROR Console A b n Order of Section Definition Section order and section name are shown below Moreover the section definition order is fixed Table B 2 Section Order and Section Names ore sene VIOManager 189 When loading from the system configuration template in the Excel format the operation column information will be skipped 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 When loading from the system configuration template in the Excel format the whole section will be skipped 3 Do not enter the information of the same physical server both in the ServerAgent and Server VMHost section System backup information is automatically added to the end of the system configuration file when exporting in the CSV format The sections after the line below contain the backup information The backup information is skipped when loading from the system configuration template in the Excel format Do not edit the following information which is used to recover the manager Do not modify the backup information as it is automatically created Note that these sections do not have to be defined if the system configuration file is created for new system configuration Note Ifasystem config
243. nter Server SCVMM or VIOM Information on the selected management software Double clicking a resource in the Resource List tab displays its Resource Details tab in the Main Panel This tab shows detailed information on the selected resource In the Resource List tab resources experiencing problems are shown with a status icon displayed on top of their resource icon Switch to the Resource Details tab to check the faulty component or open external management software to investigate the problem For details refer to Chapter 11 Monitoring Resources in the Operation Guide VE The initial display is not sorted Clicking a column heading in the Resource List tab will sort the displayed resources in ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to move forwards and backwards by single pages and to the first or last page Physical servers physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests are displayed under the Server List Resources displayed in the Server List can be filtered by selecting or deselecting their corresponding checkboxes A 6 Resource Details Tab The Resource Details tab displays detailed information on registered resources This information is displayed by double clicking any of the following resources in the resource tree Chassis Server Physical OS VM Host VM Guest Network Device PDU or UPS Management Software vCenter Server SCVMM or V
244. nvironmental data collected from servers Can only be selected for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers 2 This option is only available for chassis equipped with power monitoring capabilities Table A 6 Popup Menus Available for Physical OSs Physical Servers VM Hosts and VM Guests Popup Menu Function Delete 1 Mae H Deletes a physical OS or VM host HBA address rename settings 3 4 Modifies the HBA address rename settings of a server Network Settings 4 5 6 Modifies the network settings of a server Modify 1 2 Spare Server Settings 3 4 Modifies a server s recovery settings Monitoring Settings Modifies the monitoring information for a server i Modifies the registered login account used to VM Host L A t 7 ost Login Account s communicate with the VM host O Powers on a server N OFF Powers off a server after shutting down its operating system Powers off a server without shutting down its operatin OFF Forced 8 pes system Reboots a server after shutting down its operatin Reboot s P 8 system Reboots a server without shutting down its operatin Reboot Forced 8 P e system ok 2 Server d3 Switches over a server with one of its spare servers 160 Popup Menu d Function NE Failback Switches back a server to its pre switchover state Accepts a switched over configuration as final without Takeover Jule a switching back to the original conf
245. o which the selected port belongs If the selected port belongs to more than one port group all port groups are shown in the displayed list Expand button Selecting an item listed below will show this button on the upper right side of this icon Clicking this button expands the resource contents Server blade LAN switch blade VM server VM guest Virtual switches LAN switch Close button Clicking this button closes expanded chassis contents replacing them with a chassis icon Point 0060606060606006060020909909006069000000009009909999099000090000092909909090909090000000099090909909000060000009990900000000009299299 Clicking the close button will close the detailed content server blades LAN switch blades that was shown for the selected chassis 06060600600000000209909000000000909090909099090090000000090909090990990990900000000009099090909090990900000000909090909909000000000909999 13 4 Resource Icons This section describes the icons used to represent resource statuses on the Network Map 13 4 1 Resource Statuses The following table details the resource statuses associated with each icon Table 13 1 Chassis Icons m 9m Mem normal No new errors or warnings were detected from the chassis 100 A warning was detected from the chassis The status of the chassis could not be obtained error An error was detected from the chassis A fatal error was detected from the chassis which is now unu
246. ocedure to change the admin LAN IP addresses of all managed servers belonging to the subnet before modification For details on how to configure these settings refer to 9 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses 3 Delete the subnet used before modification 9 1 12 Changing WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration This section explains how to change WWN settings for integration with ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser The WWN settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser integration can be changed by re configuring them Refer to 10 1 Configuring WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration for details on how to configure these settings 9 2 Changing Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service This section explains how to change settings for the HBA address rename setup service Such settings include the admin server IP address the port used to communicate with the admin server and the IP address of the HBA address rename server 9 2 1 Changing the IP Address of the Admin Server This section explains how to change the IP address of the admin server eas When this setting is changed the HBA address rename setup service automatically checks whether it can communicate with the new admin server IP address Changing this setting also requires changing the port on the admin server side beforehand Change the IP address of the admin server according to 9 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses and change the admin IP address for th
247. ocessing of registration or changing the resource has not started yet no log file is created Windows Manager Installation_tolde SVROR Manager var log config log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vrcvmr log config log Backing up the manager prior to import automatically When importing is performed by a user exporting is also automatically executed The export file is saved as the backup of the manager configuration Use this file to return to the previous values if there is an input error in the system configuration file Note that the backup can store the latest five versions The system configuration file backup can be stored in the following folder on the manager Windows Manager Folder Installation foldeNSN RORMManager war Wconfig backup File name rcxconf YY YYMMDDHHMMSS csv the date and time are shown in YY YYMMDDHHMMSS Linux Manager Directory lopt FJSVrcvmr var config backup File name rcxconf YY YYMMDDHHMMSS csv the date and time are shown in YY YYMMDDHHMMSS 0606060600600000909090900000000009090990000000000909090009090909909000000000909099909000000000090990900900000060060002299299 7 Perform post setting operations If the import is completed successfully perform the following procedures if required If HBA address rename is set then restart the relevant managed server If the agent is registered perform either one of the following to enable further backup or cloning operations Restart the managed server
248. ocuments which contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to non residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization from the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry of Japan in accordance with the above law Trademark Information BMC BMC Software the BMC logos and other BMC marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of BMC Software Inc in the U S and or certain other countries Citrix R Citrix XenServer TM Citrix Essentials TM and Citrix StorageLink TM are trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc and or one of its subsidiaries and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries Dell is a registered trademark of Dell Computer Corp HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company IBM is a registered trademark or trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the U S Linux is a trademark or registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows MS MS DOS Windows XP Windows Server Windows Vista Windows 7 Excel Active Directory and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates in the United States and other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates viii Red Hat RPM and
249. ode should be released once finished L Servers cannot be created for physical servers that are in maintenance mode 212 Glossary access path A logical path configured to enable access to storage volumes from servers active mode The state where a managed server is performing operations Managed servers must be in active mode in order to use Auto Recovery Move managed servers to maintenance mode in order to perform backup or restoration of system images or collection or deployment of cloning images active server A physical server that is currently operating admin client A terminal PC connected to an admin server which is used to operate the GUI admin LAN A LAN used to manage resources from admin servers It connects managed servers storage and network devices admin server A server used to operate the manager software of Resource Orchestrator affinity group A grouping of the storage volumes allocated to servers A function of ETERNUS Equivalent to the LUN mapping of EMC agent The section program of Resource Orchestrator that operates on managed servers Auto Recovery A function which continues operations by automatically switching over the system image of a failed server to a spare server and restarting it in the event of server failure This function can be used when managed servers are in a local boot configuration SAN boot configuration or a configuration such as iSCSI boot whe
250. of the following entries One or more node entries One or more interface entries with or without redundancy under each node entry Figure 17 3 Sample configuration of the definition file ipaddr conf NODE NAME node A IF_NAMEO eth1 Node entries IF_IPADO 192 168 10 11 Interface entries IF MASKO 255 255 255 0 without redundancy settings NODE_NAME node B VIF NAMEO shaD VIF IPADOz 192 168 20 11 VIF_MASKO 255 255 255 0 f PRI_NAMEO eth2 Interface entries Node entries SCD_NAMEO eth3 with redundancy settings POL_ADDRO 1 92 166 20 100 192 168 20 200 PAT_NAMEO shat POL_HUBSO 0N Refer to the following sample file for details of how to set the definition file ipaddr conf Windows Installation_folder Agent etc ipaddr sample Linux etc opt FJS Vnrmp lan ipaddr sample G amp Note Blank spaces and comment lines lines starting with a comment symbol are ignored The expected content of each entry is explained below Node Entries The following table explains how to define each node entry 137 Table 17 3 Node Entry Settings Managed server NODE NAME Physical server Physical server name that was set when name name registering the managed server G Note Specify additional entries for any node server that may be added in the future one entry per server 060606000000000909090090909009090920202002909909909909909090909090000000000000000000009090090090090909099
251. om the values that are input into the WWNN and the number of HBA ports HBA ports Specify the following values according to the system configuration To create a single path configuration specify 1 For details refer to Figure 7 3 Procedures for Single path Configurations Tocreate a multi path configuration specify 2 However it is necessary to specify 1 during installation of the operating system Specify 2 and reconfigure HBA address rename settings after setting up the multi path driver For details refer to Figure 7 4 Procedures for Multi path Configurations Figure 7 3 Procedures for Single path Configurations For operating system installation Software Installation and Agent Registration Install the operating system Install the multi path driver For cloning image deployment Cloning Image Deployment Install required software Install the Resource Orchestrator agent Register the agent 41 Figure 7 4 Procedures for Multi path Configurations For operating system installation For cloning image deployment Software Installation and Agent Registration Install the operating system Install required software Install the Resource Orchestrator agent Register the agent Example 060606060606060606060606060000000000900900909099099099209909909000900000000000000000000000900999999990990600690900006009006099 Cloning Image Deployment For a server with two
252. onds for ping control Enter a number from 5 to 3 600 recovery action Enter a recovery process Enter one of the following Reboot reboot Reboot Forced force reboot Switchover switchover Reboot and Switchover reboot and switchover Reboot Forced and Switchover force reboot and switchover reboot count Enter the number of times to reboot Enter a number from 1 to 3 206 Power Monitoring Device Data Section Name Enter PowerDevice as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line device name Enter the name that will be used to identify the power monitoring device Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 eoeceecee Ce Device names should be unique between all power monitoring devices The names are case sensitive ip_address Enter the same IP address as that set on the power monitoring device Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods G amp Note 0 000000000209909900099090900009090909909090909090000000090900009000000000009009099900909099000000009099090909909000000000900909299 IP addresses should be unique between all resources snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read only permission as that set on the power monitoring device Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric c
253. onitoring target and select Export Environmental Data from the popup menu The Export Environmental Data power monitoring target dialog is displayed 2 Setthe following items Figure 19 1 Export Environmental Data power monitoring target Dialog Export Environmental Data Choose the type and period of environmental data that will be exported Target Resources Select Device Name Comments IV ups Data Type Select DataType Unit Description v i Power W Instantaneous power consumption Average W Average power consumption during the power selected time span Total energy consumption during the L Energy Wh selected time span Output time Last hour v span Rate Finest sampling v Format CSV OK Cancel Help 148 Target Resources Specify the power monitoring target to export the power consumption data of Select the checkboxes of each desired target More than one target can be selected Data Type Specify the type of data to export Check the checkbox of each desired data type More than one data type can be selected Output time span Select the time span for which to export data from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Last hour Last day Last week Last month Last year Custom When Custom is selected the following fields must all be specified Rate Start day Start time End day End time Select the data sampling rate to export from th
254. orming to the format described in B 2 File Format can be imported For details on the file format refer to Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files Make sure that less than 200 resources are specified for registration or changing in the system configuration file If itis necessary to specify more than 200 resources for registration or changing do by importing multiple system configuration files When importing system configuration files which begins with RCXCSV V 1 0 in the first line the agent cannot automatically be registered Moreover the registration fails in cases where a spare server is defined to a VM host in the system configuration file 0060606200606000922922090090000000090909090909090990900000009009009020909090000000000909990909909000000000090909529900000006009092999 2 Open and log in to the ROR console according to Chapter 1 Login and Logout 3 In the ROR console select File System Configuration File Import from the menu The Import System Configuration File dialog is displayed 92 4 Specify a configuration file prepared in step 1 5 Click OK The import process starts The system configuration file is verified first and then resources are imported one by one following the order defined by the system configuration file The processing of resource registration or change is executed after the verification The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the R
255. ower ON state after confirming that the OS has started up correctly on the target server 18 Power Off and Reboot Clicking on a power button that shows Power ON status will either shut down or reboot the target server blade A Power Operation dialog is displayed in which the appropriate action can be selected Figure 6 5 Power Operation Dialog Power Operation abc Please select one of the following power operations for the server lt Ca Cancel Options gt gt Shutdown Selecting Shutdown will shut down the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog shuts down the OS and powers off the managed server At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power OFF in progress state orange blinking The power button finally displays Power OFF status after confirming that the target server has been shut down correctly Reboot Selecting Reboot will reboot the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog shuts down the OS and reboots the managed server At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power ON in progress state green blinking The power button finally displays Power ON status after confirming that the OS has started up correctly on the target server Forced Power Off and Reboot Clicking on a power button that shows
256. p between the VM host and operating VM guests is not yet retained reconfiguration of VM Home Position is necessary When a new VM guest is detected reconfigure the VM Home Position so the relationship between that VM guest and its VM host is set When configuring the home position of a system all VM Home Positions of VM guests are set to the current configuration When configuring home positions for each VM host VM guests will be associated with the VM host on which they are operating The relationships are retained even when a VM guest associated with the VM host is operating on another VM host Configuring a System s VM Home Position Use the following procedure to configure a VM Home Position for all VM hosts on a system 1 Select Operation VM Home Position Settings from the ROR console menu The Configure VM Home Position Settings dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The VM Home Position is set Configuring a VM Host s VM Home Position Use the following procedure to configure the VM Home Position for a selected VM host 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click VM host and select VM Home Position Settings from the popup menu The Configure VM Home Position Setting dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The VM Home Position is set 112 15 3 2 Migrating to VM Home Position Migrate VM guests back to their original VM hosts using the relationship information that was registered in advance
257. press interface for a PCI box GUI Graphical User Interface A user interface that displays pictures and icons pictographic characters enabling intuitive and easily understandable operation HA High Availability The concept of using redundant resources to prevent suspension of system operations due to single problems hardware initiator A controller which issues SCSI commands to request processes In iSCSI configurations NICs fit into this category hardware maintenance mode In the maintenance mode of PRIMEQUEST servers a state other than Hot System Maintenance HBA Host Bus Adapter An adapter for connecting servers and peripheral devices Mainly used to refer to the FC HBAs used for connecting storage devices using Fibre Channel technology 215 HBA address rename setup service The service that starts managed servers that use HBA address rename in the event of failure of the admin server HBAAR HBA address rename I O virtualization technology that enables changing of the actual WWN possessed by an HBA host affinity A definition of the server HBA that is set for the CA port of the storage device and the accessible area of storage It is a function for association of the Logical Volume inside the storage which is shown to the host HBA that also functions as security internal to the storage device Hyper V Virtualization software from Microsoft Corporation Provides a virtualized infrastructure on PC ser
258. prise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4
259. r profiles 25 G amp Note HBA address rename and VIOM cannot be used together within the same chassis When using backup and restore or cloning prioritize the following two boot operations 1 Boot from the first admin LAN network interface NIC1 Index1 2 Boot from the network interface used by the admin LAN NIC2 Index2 7 2 Registering VM Management Software This section explains how to register VM management software Registration of VM management software such as VMware vCenter Server is necessary to enable VM guest migrations For details on the required VM management software settings refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE Use the following procedure to register VM management software 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Register and then select the type of the VM management software to use The Register Management Software name dialog is displayed In name the type of the VM management software is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Management software name Enter the name of the target VM management software Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 Location Select the location where the VM management software to register is operating If VM management software is installed on the admin server Select Admin Server n other c
260. r the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide VE 3 Change the IP address set within the operating system Change the IP address according to the OS manual 4 Restart the HBA address rename setup service Start the HBA address rename setup service according to Chapter 6 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide VE 9 3 Changing VIOM Registration Settings Use the following procedure to perform setting changes for management software VIOM 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the management software VIOM and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Management Software VIOM Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined User ID Enter the ID of a VIOM user account Password Enter the password of the above VIOM user account 23 3 Click OK To change registered VIOM server profiles follow the procedure described in 7 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles to open the Web interface of ServerView Virtual IO Manager and change the settings Changes made inside Virtual IO Manager are automatically reflected in Resource Orchestrator 9 4 Changing LAN Switch Settings This section explains how to change LAN switch settings 9 4 1 Changing LAN Switch Basic Settings This section explains how to change LAN switch basic settings The following settings can be changed LAN
261. r the name of a telnet or SSH user account that can log in to this LAN switch blade Password Enter the password of the above telnet or SSH user account Connection method Select either Telnet or SSH The default setting is Telnet Administrative password Enter the password of this LAN switch blade s telnet or SSH administrator account If the user ID and the password of the administrator account for the LAN switch blade were set in User ID and Password simply re enter the same password in this field In this case Resource Orchestrator does not check whether the password entered here matches the password set on the LAN switch blade SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this LAN switch blade Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens 3 Click OK The registered LAN switch blade will be displayed in the server resource tree Note 00006000909009090000090999099000009090909909000009092909909090000090990999090000090909090000009090909990990990000099990909000009999000009999 A telnet or SSH connection is made when registering a LAN switch blade When telnet or SSH SSH version 2 connection is disabled enable it Refer to the manual of the relevant product Some models may have restrictions regarding the number of simultaneous connections In this case log out from other connections If the connectio
262. racters and symbols ASCII character codes 0x20 to Ox7e G Note If the name of the current administrator account on the remote management controller is longer than 16 characters either create a new account or rename the current account within 16 characters ipmi_passwd Enter the password of the remote management controller user account Enter a string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCH character codes 0x20 to 0x7e This field can be omitted if no password has been set for this user account G amp Note If the password of the current administrator account on the remote management controller is longer than 16 characters either create a new account or change its password within 16 characters 198 ipmi passwd enc Enter one of the following If ipmi_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted admin lani nic number The index of the NIC to use for the admin LAN Enter a number 1 or larger Note Ce This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers admin_lan2_nic_number The Index number of NICs used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy Enter a number 1 or larger For the following cases enter a hyphen When not using the HBA address rename setup service When redundancy of the admin LAN for managed servers does not use GLS When not using as the spare server of a managed server with redundancy configured
263. rce Status in the Operation Guide VE for details on resource statuses Hardware Details Area Server management software The link to the web interface of a server management software is displayed Displayed only when PRIMERGY servers PRIMEQUEST servers or SPARC Enterprise servers are selected Remote Management Controller IP address IP address of the remote management controller is displayed Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers I O Virtualization Management Software The link to the web interface of external I O virtualization management software is displayed Displayed only if coordinated up with external I O virtualization management software VIOM server profile The assigned VIOM server profile name is displayed Displayed only if managed by VIOM and a server profile has been set Network Properties Area Physical Connections The list of physical connections between the server s network interfaces and LAN switch ports is displayed When a column heading in the list is clicked the color of the selected column will change and the resources can be sorted in either ascending or descending order Hardware Maintenance Area NIC Summary The MAC addresses and IP addresses of each server are displayed For servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers and PRIMEQUEST servers only admin LAN information is displayed For SPARC Enterprise servers only the IP address is displayed n Information 60060002000900600000
264. re booting is performed from a disk on a network When using a local boot configuration The system is recovered by restoring a backup of the system image of the failed server onto a spare server When booting from a SAN or a disk on a LAN The system is restored by having the spare server inherit the system image on the storage Also when a VLAN is set for the public LAN of a managed server the VLAN settings of adjacent LAN switches are automatically switched to those of the spare server BACS Broadcom Advanced Control Suite An integrated GUI application comprised from applications such as BASP that creates teams from multiple NICs and provides functions such as load balancing Basic Mode A function that can be used by configuring a Cloud Edition license after installing ROR VE 213 BASP Broadcom Advanced Server Program LAN redundancy software that creates teams of multiple NICs and provides functions such as load balancing and failover blade server A compact server device with a thin chassis that can contain multiple server blades and has low power consumption As well as server blades LAN switch blades management blades and other components used by multiple server blades can be mounted inside the chassis blade type A server blade type Used to distinguish the number of server slots used and servers located in different positions BladeViewer A GUI that displays the status of blade servers in a style s
265. re hosting cluster resources 3 Restart manager services Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE G amp Note When changing the rcxweb port the following ports should be set to the same value Admin client Enter the rcxweb port in the Web browser URL used to log into Resource Orchestrator If this URL is bookmarked in the Web browser Favorites change the port set in the bookmark s URL HBA address rename setup service If the HBA address rename setup service is running change the port number used to communicate with the admin server to the rcxweb port according to 9 2 2 Changing the Port Number Used to Communicate with the Admin Server Windows Manager Change the ROR console shortcut on the manager 1 Open the following folder on the admin server Installation foldeNSVRORMManager 2 Right click the ROR Console icon and select Properties from the popup menu 3 In the Web Document tab change the port number set in the URL field as shown below URL https localhost 23461 4 Click lt OK gt When changing the nfagent port the following ports on managed servers should be set to the same value Set the nfagent port set on each managed server to the same value according to the instructions given in 9 1 6 Changing Port Numbers The system image and cloning images collected before the change can no longer be used and should be de
266. re operation For details on the Watchdog function refer to the server manual If the disk size of the source backed up server differs from that of the destination restored server restore is possible only in cases where the disk size of the destination server is larger than that of the source server In that case unused disk space will remain on the destination server To use this unused disk space a partition should first be created from it Restoring a system image to a server on which the disk size is smaller than that of the source backed up server is not possible This also applies to server switchover and failback operations that are based on backup and restore as well as cloning operations Therefore it is also necessary to ensure that spare servers of cloning destination servers have a large enough disk When backing up or restoring system images or collecting and deploying cloning images up to four processes can be executed simultaneously If four processes are already being executed any additional image operations will enter a standby state Moreover server switchover which is executed using the backup and restore method or any restore process performed during failback will also enter a standby state When Auto Recovery or manual switchover using the backup and restore method is used please limit the number of image operations backup or restore of system images or collection and deployment of cloning images performed at
267. registered as a spare server the server must meet one of the following conditions When the WWPN of the target CA is the same value as that of the primary server When the AffinityGroup value is different from the value of the primary server When agents are not registered on ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser G amp Note on When using the storage affinity switchover method if a hyphen is selected the storage path settings will be deleted 0606000000000000000000000000090090092090990909 09090090900900900009009000000000000090909000900909929999909990990990920999090999 3 Click OK Perform configuration or deletion of Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity based on the configured WWN information When the target operation server is registered on ESC the status should be as below Configuration The server should be turned on Deletion The server should be turned off When configuration and deletion of Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity have been already executed no operations will be performed on the devices G amp Note For WWPN value specification check that the value does not overlap with the WWPN used for HBA address rename or VIOM If the same WWPN is used there is a chance data on storage units will be damaged When configuration or deletion of Fibre Channel switches or storage units performed a warning dialog is displayed Make sure that there are no problems i
268. rise servers only the storage affinity switchover method can be selected In the storage affinity switchover method configuration of WWN information is necessary For how to configure WWN information refer to 10 1 Configuring WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser When using the storage affinity switchover method it is necessary to configure the target CA so that it matches the WWPN value in the access path settings of the primary server 144 Servers that have agents registered can be used as spare servers When using a server on which an agent is registered as a spare server the server must meet one of the following conditions When the WWPN of the target CA is the same value as that of the primary server When the AffinityGroup value is different from the value of the primary server When agents are not registered on ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser cannot perform event monitoring of spare servers For details on event monitoring refer to the ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Event Guide In server configurations using I O virtualization servers on which server OSs are operating can be used for spare servers Register the agent I O virtualization Server switchover settings To change a server with the above settings which does not use I O virtualization to a spare server delete the server and then re register it Note that if the server is registered while it is running an agent will be register
269. rovides more details on the chassis status and contents For details on the chassis icon refer to 6 3 3 Blade Panel LAN switch Clicking on a LAN switch icon opens up its LAN switch details screen This screen provides more details on the LAN switch s status and configuration For details on the LAN switch icon refer to 6 3 3 Blade Panel Physical server Clicking on a physical server icon opens it up in the ServerView Operation Manager s Web interface This interface provides more details on the physical server s status and its internal components For details on the physical server icon refer to Table 6 8 Physical Server Icons in 6 3 3 1 Resource List Tab 6 4 Power Control This section explains how to control the power status of server blades and VM guests from BladeViewer 6 4 1 Server Blade The power status of a server blade can be easily controlled by clicking its power button Table 6 15 Actions of Server Blade Power Buttons om Gray not lit Power OFF Powers on a server blade Green lit Shuts down or reboots a server blade Power On Clicking on a power button that shows Power OFF status will power on the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog powers on the server and starts its OS At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power ON in progress state green blinking The power button finally displays a P
270. rver Name OS Name Label Comments ap w2k3 11 ap w2k3 11 BX620 sv1 bx620 1 esx35 fi abc J web w2k3 12 web w2k3 12 hello dddd 7 win2003r2 05 win2003r2 05 fuj BX620 sv2 bx620 2 esx35 fi vm winnt4sv vm winnt4sv web w2k3 11 web w2k3 11 win2003r2 02 win2003r2 02 fuj win2003r2 07 win200312 07 fuj pvenhn m Bul 2 amp li s s5 hijo wClose Contents of the label list The Label List dialog displays server names OS names labels and comments for each server Clicking Switch To after selecting a server from the list will switch the view to the blade panel and display the selected server within its enclosing chassis 22 Editing Labels and Comments This function is only available to privileged users General users are only able to consult labels and comments Privileged user In the Label List dialog select a server and click Modify The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed The label and comment of the selected server can be edited directly from the Modify Server Settings dialog Enter the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e amp Note 06060000009209009009000000060090909090909090900000009009209050909000000000000090909090990900000000009090909200000000000009099 New lines are counted as two characters Additional in
271. s SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on the chassis management board Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens Remote server management User ID Enter the ID of a remote server management user account with administrative authority over this managed server This user ID must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long A user ID with at least administrator privileges within the remote server management must be specified 43 Password Enter the password of the above remote server management user account This password must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long amp Note The User ID and Password of Remote server management are different from the user name and password used to log in on the Web UI for management board CC 3 Click lt OK gt The mounted chassis will be displayed under the server resource tree Any partition mounted within this chassis will be detected automatically and shown as chassis name partition number Unregistered The only operation available for those unregistered partitions is server registration while the ROR console can only display their hardware statuses and properties If the manager is installed on one of those partitions this partition will be shown as chassis name partition number Admin Server In that case server registration wi
272. s 9 7 Changing Monitoring Information Settings 18 3 Changing Server Switchover Settings To start collecting environment data the collection settings should be manually set from the ROR console s option dialog 2 Restart all the managed servers that were either registered or modified following an import operation 3 The pre configuration s scope of configuration is the same as that of the ROR console Moreover the pre configuration function can perform the same labels and comments settings as those available in BladeViewer Those settings are described in Chapter 6 BladeViewer and 6 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments 91 amp Note The following operations cannot be performed by the pre configuration function and should be performed from the ROR console Deleting registered resources from Resource Orchestrator Changing the name of a registered chassis physical server only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or a power monitoring device Deleting registered admin LAN subnets Discovering registering or changing registration settings of a LAN switch Detecting physical link information from a LAN switch Canceling VIOM Integration Registration and deletion of SNMP trap destinations Configuration and change of WWN information using ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser integration The following operations cannot be performed by the pre configuration function and should be performed using comma
273. s For details refer to 2 1 1 4 Checking Used Port Numbers in the Setup Guide VE For information on how to change the ports used by ServerView Operations Manager refer to the ServerView Operations Manager manual The ports used for SNMP communication and server power control are defined by standard protocols and fixed at the hardware level and thus cannot be changed For the port numbers used by Resource Orchestrator refer to Appendix A Port List in the Design Guide VE When using a firewall on the network firewall settings should be updated to match the new port definitions and allow communications for any modified port Manager Services Use the following procedure to change the admin server ports used by manager services 1 Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE 2 Change the port numbers Use the rcxadm mgrctl modify command to set a new port number for a given service name Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm mgrctl modify port name number RETURN Linux Manager 60 opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm mgrctl modify port name number RETURN In a clustered manager configuration bring offline all cluster resources except for the manager s shared disk and IP address move all cluster resources from the primary node to the secondary node then execute the rexadm mgrctl modify command on all the nodes that a
274. s By default server names computer name or hostname or physical server names are displayed The names specified in this column will be assigned to destination servers as their computer names for Windows systems or system node names for Linux systems Those names can be changed using the following procedure 1 Double click the Server name after deployment cell of a server The Server name after deployment cell becomes editable 2 Enter a new server name Windows A string composed of up to 63 alphanumeric characters underscores on on and hyphens The string cannot be composed solely of numbers Linux A string composed of up to 64 alphanumeric characters and the following symbols Qn qnomm non non njm nn non ng on on non UO s Wy ues T y eon Fm ctum mp ND p mp A Information Since the entered server name is also used as the hostname of its corresponding destination server it is recommended to use only characters defined in RFC Request For Comments 952 Alphanumeric characters Hyphens Periods Linux 00600000000000000000000000900090990090099009090902909909909909909900909009000000000000000000000000000009929299999 d Click OK The cloning image deployment process starts The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process
275. s will take time and errors may occur during the process 3 Collect a cloning image a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the physical OS of the source server and select Cloning Collect from the popup menu The Collect a Cloning Image dialog is displayed 127 b To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Cloning Image Name Enter a name to identify the collected cloning image New When creating a new cloning image select New and enter a new cloning image name For a cloning image name enter a character string beginning with an alphabetic character and containing up to 32 alphanumeric characters and underscores _ Update When updating an existing cloning image select Update and select a cloning image from the list Cloning images with the same name can be saved up until the maximum number of image versions If the selected cloning image has already reached this limit it is necessary to delete one of its existing versions in order to create a new cloning image This can be done directly in this dialog by selecting the version to be deleted from the displayed list The selected version will be automatically deleted when collection of the new cloning image completes The maximum number of image versions is three by default This setting can be changed by following the instructions given in 8 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Comment Optional
276. sable The chassis was detected to have been powered off warning A warning was detected from the server The status of the server could not be obtained error An error was detected from the server A fatal error was detected from the server which is now unusable The server was detected to have been powered off No new errors or warnings were detected from the LAN switch blade 101 A warning was detected from the LAN switch blade The status of the LAN switch blade could not be obtained An error was detected from the LAN switch blade fatal A fatal error was detected from the LAN switch blade which is ata now unusable The LAN switch blade was detected to have been powered off Table 13 4 VM Host Icons Status Meaning Note When operating in IBP mode normal No new errors or warnings were detected from the VM host warning A warning was detected from the VM host unknown The status of the VM host could not be obtained An error was detected from the VM host A fatal error was detected from the VM host which is now unusable The VM host was detected to have been powered off Table 13 5 VM Guest Icons No new errors or warnings were detected from the VM guest 102 A warning was detected from the VM guest The status of the VM guest could not be obtained An error was detected from the VM guest A fatal error was detected from the VM guest which is now unusable The VM gue
277. sical OS and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu The Release Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click OK The target server is released from maintenance mode G amp Note When deploying a cloning image that was collected from a Windows server the following information is reset on each destination server This is a result of the execution of Microsoft s System Preparation Sysprep tool If necessary restore the following settings to their original values after the cloning image has been deployed Desktop icons and shortcuts Drive mappings The Startup and Recovery settings accessed from the Advanced tab of the System Properties window Virtual memory settings TCP IP related settings The What country region are you in now settings in the locations defined in the Location Information window Disk quota settings Storage Provider settings Microsoft Internet Explorer settings RSS feeds subscription information information stored by the Autocomplete function saved passwords Microsoft Outlook Express settings mail directory server passwords 133 Network card driver settings drivers without a digital signature should be replaced by the latest updated drivers with a digital signature Access rights to the NDocuments and Settings Default User folder While a cloning image is being deployed collection deployment and deletion cannot be performed simult
278. sion of a network device is displayed 177 Slot A slot number representing the mounted location is displayed This is only displayed for LAN switch blades A hyphen is displayed in other cases Port Properties Area Port Number The number of the port of the selected network device is displayed Port Name The name assigned to the port of the selected network device is displayed Member Port When the name of a port with link aggregation is displayed for the port name the port names of the physical port with link aggregation are displayed separated by commas on When the physical port name is displayed as the port name a hyphen is displayed Link Status The operational status of the port is displayed One of the following is displayed up down unknown Speed DuplexMode The speed and duplex mode of the operating port are displayed Link Aggregation Group The name of the link aggregation group to which the port of the selected LAN switch belongs If it does not belong to link aggregation a hyphen is displayed Link aggregation information The following information is only displayed when LAN switch blades are selected Link aggregation group name The name of the link aggregation group to which the port of the selected LAN switch blade belongs is displayed Port name The link aggregation port name is displayed For PY SWB104 PG SW109 LAG Link aggregation group number For PY SWB101 PG S
279. sis01 2 39 1 U 209 chassis01 2 40 1 U chassis01 2 41 1 U chassis01 2 42 1 U chassis01 2 43 1 U chassis01 2 44 1 U Server operation chassis name slot no server name p address mac address second mac address snmp community name ipm i ip address ipmi user name ipmi passwd pmi passwd enc admin lanl nic number admin lan2 nic number admin lan nic redundancy chassis01 1 b1ade001 192 168 3 151 1 4 ON chassis01 7 b1ade002 192 168 3 157 1 4 ON chassis01 9 b1ade003 192 168 3 159 1 4 ON rackmount001 192 168 3 200 00 E5 35 0C 34 AB public 192 168 3 199 admin admin plain OFF rackmount002 192 168 3 202 00 E5 35 0C 34 AC public 192 168 3 201 admin admin plain OFF SPARC operation server_name ip_address mgmt_snmp_community_name mgmt_ip_address mgmt_protocol mgmt_user_name m gmt_passwd mgmt_passwd_enc spe001 192 168 3 203 public 192 168 3 204 XSCF fujitsu fujitsu plain spe002 192 168 3 205 public 192 168 3 206 ILOM fujitsu fujitsu plain PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer operation chassis_name partition_no server_name ip_address boot_option pqchassis0 0 pqserver01 192 168 3 209 legacy pqchassisO 1 pqserver02 192 168 3 210 legacy pqchassisO 2 pqserver03 192 168 3 211 legacy ServerNet operation server_name nic_no vlan_id blade001 1 1 U 10 T 20 T blade001 3 1 U blade001 5 1 U blade002 1 1 U 10 T 20 T blade002 3 1 U blade002 5 1 U blad
280. source is being registered If a problem occurs on a resource a status icon indicating the problem is shown on top of the resource s own icon For details on status icons refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE Clicking a resource icon will show information related to that resource in the Main Panel Use this information to investigate the problem Power Monitoring Devices The power monitoring devices PDU or UPS used by Resource Orchestrator to monitor power consumption are displayed in a tree view For details on icons used to represent power monitoring devices refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE Clicking a power monitoring device displayed in the resource tree will display its attributes in the Main Panel Right clicking a power monitoring device will display a list of available operations in a popup menu For details on popup menus refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus Management Software Management software vCenter Server SCVMM and VIOM used in coordination with Resource Orchestrator is displayed in a tree view For details on the icons used to indicate different management software refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide VE Clicking a management software on the tree displays information related to it in the Main Panel Right clicking a management software will display a list of available operations in a popup menu For details on popup menus refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus
281. splayed VM name The name of the VM is displayed VM management software The link to the web interface of a server virtualization software is displayed Hardware Details Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests Server management software The link to the web interface of a server management software is displayed Displayed only when PRIMERGY servers PRIMEQUEST servers or SPARC Enterprise servers are selected Remote Management Controller IP address IP address of the remote management controller is displayed Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers 174 Latest System Image Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests or SPARC Enterprise servers Version The latest version of the system image is displayed Backup date The date and time of the most recent system image backup is displayed Comments Comments describing the system image are displayed Spare Server Settings Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests Primary server Displays the name of the physical server that will be replaced when server switchover occurs Active server Displays the name of the physical server that is currently running Server switchover method The method used to perform server switchover is displayed Server boot method The boot type of the system disk is displayed Automatic server recovery Shows whether automatic server recovery is enabled or not Network switchover
282. st z3 For a Physical OS Select Windows Linux For a VM Host Select VM Host and enter the VM host login account information This login account information will be used by Resource Orchestrator to control and communicate with the registered VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host G amp Note Ce ey For details about the network interface s used on the admin LAN refer to 7 1 Network Configuration in the Design Guide VE If an incorrect network interface is used Resource Orchestrator will use a wrong MAC address for the admin LAN An admin LAN IP address is required even when registering a spare server Enter an IP address that does not conflict with the IP address of any other managed server on the admin LAN A server running a VM host can still be registered as a physical OS if its Category of Server OS is set to Windows Linux For Windows Server 2008 etc A VM host server that was mistakenly registered as a physical OS should be deleted and re registered as a VM host When registering rack mount servers on which VMware ESXi is operating select Disable for Association with server management software ServerView even when using PRIMERGY servers After registering the server clear the Register agent checkbox and register the agent after registration of t
283. st should be in a state that allows VM maintenance mode to be set If the target VM host is in a high availability configuration all VM guests stored on shared disks should be migrated to another VM host beforehand After restoring the VM host migrate the VM guests back to their original VM host Refer to the server virtualization software manual and D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE for information on how to restore and migrate VM guests or about the VM maintenance mode Deleting a managed server will delete its backed up system images at the same time It is not possible to backup restore or delete a system image from a managed server for which a system image including different versions is already being backed up restored or deleted When restoring a system image on a server whose name was changed after the deployment of a cloning image check that the server name displayed on the server resource tree and the System Image List match the new server name before restoring the system image For managed servers on which the Watchdog function is enabled backup or restore operations on that server may be aborted by an automatic restart or shutdown The Watchdog is a function which automatically restarts or shuts down non responsive servers when their operating system does not respond for a given period Therefore it is highly recommended to disable the Watchdog function before a backup or resto
284. st was detected to have been powered off normal No new errors or warnings were detected from the virtual switch A warning was detected from the virtual switch The status of the virtual switch could not be obtained An error was detected from the virtual switch A fatal error was detected from the virtual switch which is now unusable The virtual switch was detected to have been powered off 103 A warning was detected from the LAN switch The status of the LAN switch could not be obtained An error was detected from the LAN switch A fatal error was detected from the LAN switch which is now unusable The LAN switch was detected to have been powered off Table 13 8 Port Icons El EN No errors were detected from the port An error was detected from the port e g its opposite port or NIC was disabled or the cable between this link and its opposite port or NIC was disconnected Note This icon is displayed for the following ports The currently selected port The port opposite to the selected port In IBP mode all ports that belong to the selected port group In IBP mode all ports that belong to the same port group as the selected port 13 4 2 VLAN Display The following resource icons are used when displaying VLANs in the Network Map Table 13 9 Resource Icons for VLAN Displa Chassis Server 104 Meaning LAN switch blade Virtual switch LAN switch B J
285. stem image backup collected from the selected server is displayed under Latest System Image For details about system image information refer to A 6 Resource Details Tab 16 5 Deleting This section explains how to delete system image backups System images can also be deleted using commands Refer to Chapter 4 Image Operations in the Reference Guide Command VE for details Deleting a System Image Use the following procedure to delete a system image 1 In the ROR console select the Image List tab The System Image List is displayed 2 In the System Image List right click the system image to delete and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete a System Image dialog is displayed 3 Click OK The selected system image is deleted amp Note A system image cannot be recovered once it has been deleted CC 121 Chapter 17 Cloning Physical Servers This chapter explains how to use the server cloning function 17 1 Overview Cloning is a function used to deploy a cloning image collected from a single managed server source server to other managed servers destination servers This function shortens the time required for an initial installation as it can be used to install the same operating system and software on multiple servers Software maintenance can also be performed quickly and easily by deploying a cloning image collected from a server on which patch application or software addition or
286. string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 202 amp Note Server names should be unique between all servers Names are not case sensitive 0606060000000909099099090000000090909090909090000000009090900900900900000000900900909090909000000000009099092000000000000092999 ip address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources Ce HBA address rename Information of a Server Section Name Enter ServerWWNN as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section port count This is the number of ports that use HBA address rename Enter a number between 1 and 2 wwnn Enter the 16 digit hexadecimal WWNN string of the physical server which uses the HBA address rename function Enter a hexadecimal string using alphanumeric characters with 20 0 as the first three characters Note All WWNNs should be unique between all resources WWNNS are not case sensitive Names are not case sensitive Server Switchover Management Information Section Name Enter SpareServer as the section name Section Header operation Enter the des
287. t XSCF IP address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller XSCF User ID Enter the ID of a XSCF user account with administrative authority over this server Enter up to 31 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores _ or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character This user should have platadm privileges for XSCF Password Enter the password of the above XSCF user account Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols ms ge gu Qo An amp LA sp a xn pes Men uA mar pn mon om um U lt Jm UE 2n d en SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this server s remote management controller XSCF Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens For SPARC Enterprise T servers Controller type Select ILOM IP address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller ILOM User ID Enter the ID of an ILOM user account with administrative authority over this server on on Enter between 4 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character This user ID should have Admin privileges for ILOM 46 Password Enter the password of the above ILOM user a
288. t Software VIOM VLAN Selecting a VLAN ID shows a list of resources on which this ID has been applied to Chassis Server VM Host VM Guest LAN Switch NICs LAN Switch Port Main Panel The Main Panel displays information on resources selected in the tree Resource List Tab Displays information on resources related to the resource selected in the resource tree Resource Details Tab Displays more detailed information on the resource selected in the tree or a resource that was double clicked in the Resource List tab 154 Recovery Settings Tab Displays information on the spare servers assigned to the resource selected in the resource tree Image List Tab Displays system and cloning image information Network Map Tab Displays a network diagram of registered resources Events Resource Orchestrator events and related information are displayed The event log displays a history of events that have occurred on managed resources Recent Operations Displays the progress statuses and results of operations performed in Resource Orchestrator lt BladeViewer gt gt gt Button Opens the BladeViewer interface BladeViewer is a management interface specially designed for blade servers It can only be used in conjunction with PRIMERGY BX servers registered as managed servers A 2 Menus This section describes the menus available in the ROR console Figure A 2 Menu File View Settings Operat
289. t a VM guest that is not properly configured will result in an error For details refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE Depending on the server virtualization environment a VM guest may automatically migrate to another VM host when a power control operation is performed This may cause power control operations to fail and return an error when used on VM guests For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE A VM guest can be configured to automatically start or stop whenever its VM host starts up or shuts down This can be achieved by configuring the VM guest s startup and shutdown options in the server virtualization software used For details refer to the server virtualization software manual Windows Take caution regarding the following points when shutting down or rebooting a managed server running a Windows operating system If Windows is not configured to shut down when the computer s power button is pressed the power operations in Resource Orchestrator may not function properly To check this option access the Control Panel open the Power Options and check the settings of the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window Ifa file is being edited by a logged in user a dialog prompting the user to save the file is displayed and the system may not shut down immediately In such cases shutdown does not take place until the user takes the
290. t first be defined VLAN Specify the VLAN ID to assign to a LAN switch blade port Adding a new VLAN ID a Under VLAN select Create new b Enter a VLAN ID number For details on VLAN IDs refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade to be used Modifying an existing VLAN ID a Under VLAN select Change b Select a VLAN ID Physical Port Link Aggregation Select port numbers to configure or VLAN types of link aggregation group names Untagged or Tagged 3 Click lt OK gt Check that the VLAN has been set 4 Select the LAN switch blade in the server resource tree of the ROR console and display the Resource Details tab Confirm that the VLAN information is displayed in VLAN Area on Resource Details 7 3 6 Configuring VLANs on Internal Ports Use the following procedure to configure VLANs on a LAN switch blade s internal ports 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or the physical OS or VM host on the server and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The Network Settings dialog is displayed 2 Select the index of the network interface for which to assign a VLAN ID and click Setting The VLAN Configuration dialog is displayed 33 3 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Port VLAN VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID to assign to the LAN switch blade port that is connected to the network interface selected in step 2 Tagged VLAN VLA
291. t on the management board Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens mgmt user name Enter the name of a remote server management user account with administrative privileges This user name must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long mgmt passwd Enter the password of the remote server management account This password must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long mgmt passwd enc Enter one of the following f mgmt_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Chassis Data Section Name Enter SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the name that will be used to identify the chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 193 amp Note Chassis names should be unique between all chassis Names are not case sensitive Cr ip_address Enter the same IP address as that configured on the XSCF Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources Cr ooocoooooooooooooooooooocooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo snmp_community_name Ent
292. t software is displayed in name 2 Enter the following items Location Select the location of the VM management software registration to change If VM management software is installed on the admin server Select Admin Server In other cases Select Other Server IP address If Other Server was selected enter the IP address of the server on which VM management software is installed sj User ID Enter the user ID to use to control VM management software Password Enter the password for VM management software 3 Click OK VM management software settings are changed 9 6 Changing Power Monitoring Environment Settings This section explains how to change power monitoring environment settings Power environment settings include environmental data settings collection cancel settings and power monitoring device settings 9 6 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings Use the following procedure to change environmental data settings 1 Select Tools Options from the ROR console menu The Options dialog is displayed 2 Click the Environmental Data category title and input the following items in the displayed area Data to collect Select the Power checkbox to start collecting power consumption data Polling interval in minutes Enter the time interval of the data collection 1 6 or 10 The number of devices that can be monitored simultaneously depends on the value of this polling interval and the load put on th
293. taining up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 44 SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community of the XSCF used to manage the target chassis Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens Remote management controller XSCF User ID Enter the ID of an XSCF user account with administrative authority over the target chassis This name must start with an alphabet Enter a string of up to 31 alphanumeric characters hyphens and underscores on character This user should have platadm privileges for XSCF Password Enter the password of an XSCF user account with administrative authority over the target chassis Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols ms ge Qo An amp LA I nq wn nos s DA UA gn a i m woi lt Jm nt n un en on 3 Click OK The mounted chassis will be displayed under the server resource tree Any partition mounted within this chassis will be detected automatically and shown as chassis name partition number Unregistered The only operation available for those unregistered partitions is server registration while the ROR console can only display their hardware statuses and properties 7 6 2 Registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Servers This section explains the method for
294. tch configuration External M t m C Re ee Opens a LAN switch s Web interface Software Note Not available for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode Table A 9 Popup Menus Available for System Images Popup Menu Function Menu Submenu Table A 10 Popup Menus Available for Cloning Images Popup Menu Function Deploy fee l Deploys a cloning image to a server amp Note If ServerView Deployment Manager is used on the admin LAN the popup menu for cloning images cannot be used 162 Table A 11 Popup Menus Available for Network Devices Popup Menu Function Discover LAN switches Discovers LAN switches within the admin LAN Topology Detect physical links Acquires physical link data from registered LAN switches Table A 12 Popup Menus Available for the Power Monitoring Devices Tree Node Popup Menu Function Menu Submenu Power Monitoring Device Registers a power monitoring device Environmental Data Exports environmental data Table A 13 Popup Menus Available for Power Monitoring Devices Popup Menu Function Update eC Updates a power monitoring device PDU or UPS Modifies a power monitoring device s registration Modify Registration Settings p 2 B settings Hardware Detects and re configures the properties of a replaced Re configure o power monitoring device PDU or UPS Expot Environmental Data Exports environmental data Unlike other resourc
295. tches If WWN information is set for the target server The host affinity settings of storage units and the zoning settings of Fibre Channel switches will be deleted when the SPARC server is deleted Ifthe deleted server is a PRIMERGY BX series server a PRIMEQUEST server or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server The target server will be unregistered and remain in the server resource tree 86 n Information If HBA address rename has already been set up on the managed server the HBA WWN is reset to the factory default When this occurs the managed server is turned on temporarily after the power is forcibly turned off once When the operating system is running on a managed server it is recommended to shut it down before deleting the server Factory default Deleted from Registered in Resource Orchestrator Resource Orchestrator VWN set by Resource Orchestrator VM guests can be deleted using the management console of the server virtualization software used Doing so will automatically delete those VM guests from Resource Orchestrator as well If the same storage device volume is to be used to operate the target server after the server has been deleted use storage management software such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to reset the storage host affinity and fibre channel switch zoning with the factory default WWN Any system images backed up from the target server are also deleted automatically A
296. the ROR console has not been enabled yet a Download dialog for the Java policy setup script is displayed 3 Click OK This will download the Java policy setup script Save the script to an arbitrary location 4 Execute the saved Java policy setup script This will configure Java policy settings and allow launch of the VM management console 5 Close all Web browsers After closing all open Web browsers start a new Web browser and re log into the ROR console The VM management console can now be launched from the ROR console A Information Depending on script related settings the command prompt opened by the Java policy setup script may close right after finishing its execution making it impossible to confirm whether the script ended successfully In this case select start Run from the Windows start menu and execute the following command wscript Full path name of the Java policy setup script 114 Chapter 16 Backup and Restore This chapter explains how to use the backup and restore functions provided in Resource Orchestrator 16 1 Overview The backup and restore functions allow the backup and restoration of system images from physical OSs or VM hosts The system image backup and restore function enables back up of images of physical OSs and VM hosts over the network and stores them on a disk on the admin server A system image backup can be used for the following purposes Software maintenance A system
297. the Resource Orchestrator Database Chapter Ewa un lc D M 9 1 Changing Chassis and Managed Server Settings 9 1 1 hangme Chassis Mamie eere men eo rrt ssoucsolsa E HELF ROT T EPOR SEEN EO TOTO UTE ae a eei Pei deep S STA hanging Server NaMe esses ae mo metre desi bcd cbs recen tX EP ORO E SERE HER ad ex ER ests e A 9 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addbesses ese eerte ttti rre ter per ert tere breites tetti ris e eee EO e eren taret 9 1 4 Changme SNMP COIBUEUBIGS n rre herren deem dee er YU ER D ERECTO EHE EE E EE P FO eret n 68 9 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings soiirci aireari reiasa iiaiai Ree adeant O16 ror dM uon Ruin c M 9 1 7 Changing VM Host Login Account Information 9 1 8 Changing the VLAN Settings of LAN Switch Bl des u esee eene eite tte Ere tir re Ere tiere rhet pe tme 9 1 9 Changing HBA address rename SOMOS occ oe cepe sori eric rnt rere teet et pr det ertet ie di Rede resi iie Eee Ce er topi VENIET Pana EDI E E 9 T UC Boateme Admin LAN SUIS ee oe ee eee ko bte rete ridi Rs cei ete E ERN De eta ENERE h 9 1 12 Changing WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration 92 Changing Settings for the HBA address rename Setup ServiGe seas eset tpe tret ern tbe erase rte eei e e n Reb in 92 1 Changing the IP Address pt the Admin Servet se etie oneri ee eei Fuse c ER acd suadessenses 9
298. the chassis management blade on Enter the IP address using periods Chassis name Enter a name to assign to this chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on the chassis management blade Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 27 3 Click OK The mounted chassis will be displayed under the server resource tree Any server blade mounted within this chassis will be detected automatically and shown as chassis name Slot numberUnregistered The only operation available for those unregistered server blades is server registration while the ROR console can only display their hardware statuses and properties If the manager is installed on one of those server blades this blade will be shown as chassis name Slot number Admin Server In that case server registration will not be available for the admin server but its hardware status and properties will be displayed in the ROR console 7 3 2 Registering Blade Servers To register a blade server PRIMERGY BX series a PRIMEQUEST server or a SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server its enclosing chassis must be registered first When using VIOM for I O virtualization VIOM server profiles should be registered in
299. the same time to 3 When using backup and restore for PRIMEQUEST servers check that the boot option settings and BIOS settings of the target servers match When the settings are different execute the function after changing the settings so they match For details on how to change boot options refer to 9 1 10 Changing Boot Options When using PRIMEQUEST1000x2 disable the xZAPIC mode of the UEFI 006006200092099090000090992929040900000090909909000009090090909000000909099099090000099090909000009099009909909000009909099090000909099090000009999 16 2 Backup This section explains how to collect a system image backup System images can only be backed up from managed servers that are not in stop status System images can also be backed up using commands Refer to Chapter 4 Image Operations in the Reference Guide Command VE for details Preparations Execute the command below before performing backup if the managed server has the following configuration Ina SAN data environment using a built in disk boot and a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager 116 gt Installation_tolde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN Linux Manager v opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN When using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename
300. the server virtualization software used Resource Orchestrator makes use of the following naming convention For details on migration pre requisites and terminology refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE Live migration Migration of a VM guest without shutting down its VM host Cold migration Migration of a VM guest while its VM host is shut down A VM guest after migration is set to the same power status as it was before the migration The availability of those methods depends on the power status of VM guests as described below Table 15 1 Migration Methods Available for Each Power Status Migration Method VM Guest Power Status Default This method is available and selected by default Available This method is available N A This method is not available A VM guest after migration is set to the same power status as it was before the migration For example performing a cold migration on an operating VM guest will temporally shut it down during migration before starting it up again after completion of the migration process It is therefore recommended to set the target VM guest to the desired post migration power status before performing migration Use the following procedure to migrate a VM guest 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click a VM guest to migrate and select Migrate VM Guest popup menu 2 The VM Guest Migration dialog is displayed Set the following items
301. thods for changing and checking the generations of cloning images refer to 5 8 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE Gj Note If the specified limit is smaller than the number of existing cloning image versions older versions will not be deleted automatically In this case collecting a new cloning image version will require selecting a previous image version for deletion Delete unused image versions manually if they are no longer necessary For details refer to 17 5 Deleting If the ROR console has been already opened refresh the Web browser after changing the maximum number of system image versions Ce 8 5 Changing the Image Folder Location Use the following procedure to change the location path of the image files folder l 2 Select the Image List tab in the ROR console and confirm the current image list Log on to the admin server with OS administrative privileges Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide VE Change the location of the image file storage folder Change the location of the image file storage folder according to the instructions given in 5 8 rexadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command VE Because image files are actually copied over to the new location this step may take some time to complete In a clustered manager configuration for details on how to change the image file storage folder location r
302. tion settings after changing to Legacy boot For details on how to change boot options refer to 9 1 10 Changing Boot Options When using local disks as system disks and iSCSI storage as data disks refer to the advisory notes described in Table 8 1 Supported Storage Device Configurations in 8 1 1 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide VE 130 Deploying a Cloning Image Use the following procedure to deploy a cloning image to one or more destination servers 1 Place the destination server s into maintenance mode only for agent registered servers a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the desired server or its physical OS and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu The Set Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click OK The target server is placed into maintenance mode 2 Deploy a cloning image Deploying a cloning image to a single destination server a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the destination server or its physical OS and select Cloning Deploy from the popup menu The Deploy a Cloning Image dialog is displayed The available cloning images are displayed Only cloning images that have been collected from a server of the same model as the destination server are available for deployment b Select the cloning image to deploy and set the following items Server name after deployment Enter the name of the server to which the cloning
303. tl modify command to set a new IP address Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt Inaclustered manager configuration for details on how to change the admin IP address registered for the manager refer to Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations Log in to the managed server with an OS administrator account Change ServerView Agents settings on the managed server Change the SNMP trap destination of the ServerView Agents Refer to the ServerView Agent manual for details on changing SNMP trap settings 55 8 10 11 12 13 14 Stop the agents on managed servers Windows Hyper V Linux Xen KVM Stop the agent referring to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE Change Agent settings Windows Hyper V Linux Xen KVM Use the rcxadm agtctl modify command to set the new manager IP address Windows Hyper V gt Installation_folde Agent bin rcxadm agtctl modify manager P_address lt RETURN gt Linux Xen KVM opt FJSVrcxat bin rexadm agtctl modify manager P_address RETURN Restart the agents on managed servers Windows Hyper V Linux Xen KVM Start the agent referring to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide VE Restart the manager Start the manager
304. to 7 4 2 Registering LAN Switches SSH connection SSH version 2 can be selected for the following LAN switch blades LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 1 00 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 4 16 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 3 12 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 3 12 or later version 9 4 2 Changing VLANs Set for External Ports of LAN Switch Blades VLAN IDs and types Port Tagged VLAN set on the external ports of a managed LAN switch blade can be changed 74 Note VLANs cannot be changed on PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode If the port VLAN ID is unspecified or 1 a tagged VLAN ID cannot be set to 1 When using End Host Mode for the following LAN switch blades cannot modify a port vlan id and remove a tag vlan for the external ports which meet the follwoing conditions When doing the operation inactivate a target external port or change vlan id for internal ports which have the same vlan id as a target external port LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 Conditions The port is selected as Selected Port The port is activated More than one internal port have the same vlan Changing VLAN IDs This section explains how to change VLAN IDs set on the external ports of a LAN switc
305. tput together with error details to the following file Windows Installation foldeNAgentNarMog error lan log 141 Linux var opt FJS Vnrmp logs error lan log For details on meanings of message and the appropriate corrective actions refer to Messages The file size limit is 32 KB and only one version is maintained Old logs will have the extension old appended to the file name and remain in the same directory 17 6 3 Clearing Settings This section explains how to disable the network parameter auto configuration function and clear the settings that were applied Disabling the Network Parameter Auto Configuration Function The network parameter auto configuration function of the cloning image being collected can be disabled by executing the following command After disabling it collect a new cloning image to update the existing image Windows gt Installation foldeNAgenti binwexadm lanctl disable lt RETURN gt opt FJSVrexat bin rcxadm lanctl disable lt RETURN gt r 5 x a Clearing Network Parameter Settings If network settings must be added or changed due to the addition of a new server first clear the existing settings Clear the network parameter settings of managed server by executing the following command Windows gt Installation_folde Agent bin rcxadm lanctl unset lt RETURN gt T Eae 5 E pan opt FJS Vrexat bin rcxadm lanctl unset lt RETURN gt For details on
306. tting down its operating system Powers off a server without shutting down its operating system Reboots a server after shutting down its operating system Reboots a server without shutting down its operating system Ne Turns the maintenance LED on Turns the maintenance LED off Switches over a server with one of its spare servers Switches back a server to its pre switchover state Accepts a switched over configuration as final without switching back to the original configuration Detects and re configures the properties of a replaced server Restores a LAN switch configuration Places a server into maintenance mode Sets a server to active mode Le resres asyem inae senes Migrates a VM guest to a different VM host Sets VM Home Position Clears VM Home Position Migrates a VM guest to VM Home i Position Discovers LAN switches within the E admin LAN Acquires physical link data from 7 registered LAN switches N Displays license settings and registered i licenses Yes 11 Modifies client and environmental data settings Displays environmental data graphs N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o S If multiple ROR consoles or BladeViewer sessions exist the login sessions may be terminated 2 Cannot be selected for a VM guest 3 Cannot be selected for PRIMEQUEST and SPARC Enterprise Partition Models
307. ttings The procedure used to change server switchover settings is the same as that described in 18 2 Settings for Server Switchover For details refer to Chapter 18 Server Switchover Settings 18 4 Canceling Server Switchover Settings Use the following procedure to cancel server switchover settings 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click a server or a physical OS or VM host on the server and select Modify Spare Server Settings from the popup menu The Spare Server Settings dialog is displayed 2 Clear the checkbox in the Select column for the desired spare server 3 Click OK The selected spare server is no longer set as a spare server 147 2 Chapter 19 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs This chapter explains how to export the power consumption data collected from registered power monitoring targets and how to display it as graphs and also describes the exported data s format 19 1 Exporting Power Consumption Data This section explains how to export power consumption data The power consumption data for each power monitoring target that is registered in the power monitoring environment can be exported in CSV format The exported data can be selected by specifying the desired data types power and energy time spans and sampling rate Use the following procedure to export power consumption data 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click a power m
308. twork address Enter the network address for the subnet used as the admin LAN Enter valid values for the network address subnet mask Enter valid values for the subnet mask gateway Enter the settings for the gateway used for communication with the admin server on the admin LAN VIOM Data Section Name Enter VIOManager as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line name Specify VIOM ip address Enter the IP address of the terminal on which VIOM is installed Specify 127 0 0 1 login name Enter the name of a VIOM user account When specifying a domain use the following syntax domain namewuser name 191 login passwd Enter the password of the above VIOM user account passwd enc Enter one of the following If login passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted Chassis Data Section Name Enter Chassis as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the name that will be used to identify the chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 amp Note Chassis names should be unique between all chassis Names are not case sensitive ip address Enter the same IP address as that s
309. type is physical server Enter one of the following Server name server name of ServerAgent section VM host name server name of Server VMHost section When resource type is vm guest Enter the registered VM guest name When resource type is common Do not enter any characters label optional This label is used to identify the applications running on each server Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e Note that if the value of resource type is common do not enter anything amp Note Line breaks n are not available comment optional This is a comment that can be set as an option for each application If the resource type is common this can be used for the contact details maintenance information or other information Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e B 4 Examples of CSV Format This section shows an example of the system configuration file in the CSV format 208 RCXCSV V3 5 ServerView Resource Orchestrator System configuration file Subnet operation subnet_name network_address subnet_mask gateway subnet1 172 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 172 16 0 1 subnet2 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 VIOManager operation name ip address login name login passwd passwd enc VIOM 127 0 0 1 administrator administrator plain Chassis operation chassis_name ip_address snmp_community_nam
310. ual refer to PRIMERGY BX servers Oracle Solaris may also be indicated as Solaris Solaris Operating System or Solaris OS References and character strings or values requiring emphasis are indicated using double quotes Window names dialog names menu names and tab names are shown enclosed by brackets Button names are shown enclosed by angle brackets lt gt or square brackets The order of selecting menus is indicated using Text to be entered by the user is indicated using bold text Variables are indicated using italic text and underscores The ellipses in menu names indicating settings and operation window startup are not shown The gt used in Windows is included in usage examples When using Linux read gt as meaning The URLs in this manual were correct when the manual was written Menus in the ROR console Operations on the ROR console can be performed using either the menu bar or pop up menus By convention procedures described in this manual only refer to pop up menus Regarding Installation Folder Paths The installation folder path may be given as C Fujitsu ROR in this manual Replace it as shown below When using Windows 64 bit x64 C Program Files x86 Resource Orchestrator When using Windows 32 bit x86 C Program Files Resource Orchestrator Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in this manual Microsoft R Windo
311. ually cloned Data disk content second disk onwards cannot be cloned It is recommended to use other backup software or copy features available in storage systems for such purposes Note that all partitions Windows drives or Linux partitions included in the boot disk will be cloned Table 17 1 coing Target Examples Second Because managed servers are restarted during the cloning process it is necessary to stop all applications running on those servers beforehand The first partition must be a primary partition When multiple partitions exist within the disk of the cloning target the drive letters for the drives other than the system drive may be changed after cloning images are deployed Change the drive letter back to the original letter after deploying cloning images Dynamic disks cannot be used 122 Cloning images can be collected with the following file systems Note that LVM Logical Volume Manager partitions are not supported NTFS EXT3 EXT4 LinuxSwap The following conditions must be met for the managed server to collect the cloning image from and the managed server to deploy the cloning image to All server models must be identical The hardware configuration of each server must be identical including optional cards expansion boards and the slots they are mounted in The same BIOS settings must have been made for all servers according to the procedure in 6 2 7 Configuring BIOS
312. unt with administrative authority over this server Enter up to 16 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e Password Enter the password of the above remote management controller user account Enter up to 16 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e This field can be omitted if no password has been set for this user account 36 Association with server management software ServerView Enable Disable For PRIMERGY BX servers Select Enable and enter an SNMP Community For servers other than PRIMERGY servers Select Disable By default Enable is selected SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this server Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address used by this server on the admin LAN MAC address NIC1 Enter the MAC address of this server s admin LAN network interface Enter a MAC address in either one of the following two formats hyphen delimited xx xx xx xx xx xx or colon delimited XX XX XX XX XX XX MAC addresses will be automatically detected when the Register agent checkbox is selected SAN Boot Admin LAN Redundancy MAC address NIC2 Enter the MAC address of the second admin LAN network interface This network interface is to be used b
313. up correctly on the target server Note VM Host Take caution regarding the following points when powering off or rebooting a VM host When using a server virtualization software s high availability feature confirm that the server is set to VM maintenance mode within that virtualization software This can be confirmed from the virtualization software client Perform power operations only after setting VM maintenance mode either from the VM management software client or using the resource control command Refer to the server virtualization software manual or to 3 2 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command VE for details Depending on the server virtualization software used some restrictions may apply to the use of VM maintenance mode settings For details about such restrictions refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE 6 4 2 VM Guest The power status of a VM guest can be controlled by clicking the OS icon of its VM host and then clicking its power button in the list of VM guests that is displayed Clicking on the power button provides power controls similar to those provided for server blades Table 6 16 Actions of VM Guest Power Buttons 5 Gray not lit Powers on a VM guest 20 Green lit Shuts down or reboots a VM guest G amp Note VM guests need to be properly configured in order to use the shut down or reboot buttons Attempting to shut down or reboo
314. uration file CSV format is imported and then exported the line order after export may differ from the line order before import The following information will also be deleted Comments lines Strings enclosed in parenthesis indicating omitted values Extra commas at the end of lines As with chassis for server blades and chassis for LAN switch blades items that need to be registered in advance to enable registration of other should be defined in the system configuration file or registered in advance 190 Character Code The system configuration files CSV format used for pre configuration are saved using ASCII often referred to as ANSI in Windows systems When files that use a character code other than ASCII are imported the system may not operate correctly When directly editing configuration files using a text editor please do not save the file using a character code other than ASCII B 3 Resource Definitions This section explains the resource definition information specified system configuration files Admin LAN Subnet Data Section Name Enter Subnet as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line subnet name Enter the subnet name Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetic character and containing up to 16 alphanumeric characters underscores _ hyphens and periods o ne
315. used for the admin LAN is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected CPU type The type of CPU is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers CPU clock speed CPU clock speed frequency is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers Memory Size The total capacity of server memory is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers For SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers this is displayed only when the server is powered on Admin LAN MAC address 2 The MAC address of the network interface used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers 171 Hardware Maintenance Mode The hardware maintenance mode of the server is displayed Displayed only for PRIMEQUEST servers Boot option The boot option setting specified when registering servers is displayed wA See Refer to the Management Blade s manual for details on management blades product names Refer to the ServerView Operation Manager manual for details on the server models displayed and obtained from ServerView Operation Manager Refer to 11 2 Resou
316. ust already be configured on the primary server and the spare server If the above conditions are not meet divide the section as different CSV files and import them one by one b Agent section ServerAgent or ServerVMHost To register an agent it must fulfill all of the following conditions Please import agents only if they meet all these conditions The agent of Resource Orchestrator must already be installed on the managed server An OS must be running on the managed server The agent of the target physical server must be registered or the agent registration section defined in the system configuration file n the Server section when registering or changing managed servers in different subnets than the admin server one of the following conditions must be fulfilled The target subnet information is registered The target subnet s information is defined in the Subnet section of the CSV format system configuration file amp Note When registering a new server with the registered primary server and configuring it as a spare server import the Server section and SpareServer section separately When changing physical server names during pre configuration it cannot be performed at the same time as other pre configuration operations Import the Server section separately from other sections 0606000000009209090990900000006009090909090909090000000909090900905909000000000000900909099090000000000090902000909
317. ver to be executed correctly Once settings are complete perform switchover and failback on each spare server that has been set up to verify that these operations can be executed correctly A function to check the server operations after auto recovery has been activated by causing a dummy failure to occur is not provided with Resource Orchestrator The testing method for automatic server recovery is the same as for manual server switchover Make sure the server is operational by performing the manual server switchover test For details on switchover and failback methods refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE 146 G amp Note For servers other than those using I O virtualization and those with WWN settings registered the following checks will not be enabled Power off forced when the server is switched over checkbox Switchover to server where VM guest exists checkbox VM Host The automatic startup of VM guests after the switchover of their VM host depends on their virtual machines startup configuration within the server virtualization software used For details refer to the manual of server virtualization software Depending on the server virtualization product used a newly created VM guest may require some re configuration before running a server switchover Refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE for details on such settings 18 3 Changing Server Switchover Se
318. vers enabling flexible management of operations I O virtualization option An optional product that is necessary to provide I O virtualization The WWNN address and MAC address provided is guaranteed by Fujitsu Limited to be unique Necessary when using HBA address rename IBP Intelligent Blade Panel One of operation modes used for PRIMERGY switch blades This operation mode can be used for coordination with ServerView Virtual I O Manager VIOM and relations between server blades and switch blades can be easily and safely configured ILOM Integrated Lights Out Manager The name of the Remote Management Controller for SPARC Enterprise T series servers image file A system image or a cloning image Also a collective term for them both IPMI Intelligent Plattorm Management Interface IPMI is a set of common interfaces for the hardware that is used to monitor the physical conditions of servers such as temperature power voltage cooling fans power supply and chassis These functions provide information that enables system management recovery and asset management which in turn leads to reduction of overall TCO IQN iSCSI Qualified Name Unique names used for identifying iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets iRMC integrated Remote Management Controller The name of the Remote Management Controller for Fujitsu s PRIMERGY servers iSCSI A standard for using the SCSI protocol over TCP IP networks LAN switch blades
319. within Resource Orchestrator Refer to 7 3 6 Configuring VLANS on Internal Ports for details on how to configure these settings 9 1 9 Changing HBA address rename Settings This section explains how to change the HBA address rename settings The WWNs and HBA ports that are set by HBA address rename can be reconfigured normally within Resource Orchestrator Refer to 7 4 3 HBA address rename Settings for details on how to configure these settings 9 1 10 Changing Boot Options This section explains how to change boot option settings The boot options configured for PRIMEQUEST servers can be changed by re configuring them Use the following procedure to configure the boot option settings 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Boot option For UEFI Select UEFI For Legacy Boot Select Legacy boot G Note 00060600090999099090000909990990900900909099099090900009090990909909090009009099099099090000099909909900000099099099099099090009999099090000909990909000090999 Changing the boot option changes the information registered with Resource Orchestrator As the actual boot option will not be changed it is necessary to change the BIOS settings when performing the change 9 1 11 Changing Admin LAN Subnets Use t
320. work Map This chapter provides an overview of the Network Map and describes its features 13 1 Overview The Network Map displays the following information for resources managed in Resource Orchestrator Network configuration of physical and virtual servers including virtual switches and VM guests Statuses of network links between all resources VLAN configuration affecting each physical and virtual server Two different maps listed below are available within the Network Map Switch between the maps as necessary Overall map Displays chassis servers and their connections network links with adjacent LAN switches Local map Shows a more detailed map focused on the selected resource chassis or server This map displays resources contained in the selected resource e g server blades LAN switch blades VM hosts VM guests virtual switches and their connections links with adjacent LAN switches or chassis Up to two chassis can be displayed at a time In the Network Map resource icons are used to represent the status of each resource Moreover different colors are used to represent different link statuses The network map creates physical logical links by searching the related resources When there are more resources chassis physical virtual servers NICs physical virtual switches and ports the number of network links increases and it takes more time for drawing These drawing operations are performed when displayi
321. work device tree G amp Note 0606060000009099090000090909090000009090990909000009090909009090000060909090900000090900909000000090900909000000909909900000009090900000090299 It is possible to set an automatically detected IP address to another unregistered LAN switch However this will result in the Resource Orchestrator configuration being inconsistent with the actual network configuration If aLAN switch was registered with the IP address of another network device delete the registered LAN switch following the instructions given in 11 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches then perform Discover and Register again 7 4 3 HBA address rename Settings Use the following procedure to configure HBA address rename settings The HBA address rename function allows the admin server to control the WWNs set on a managed server s HBAs Since the admin server carried over these settings when performing maintenance on or switching managed servers it is not necessary to set the storage side configuration again Use of the HBA address rename function requires registering specific settings for each managed server in advance amp Note The HBA address rename function is not available if ServerView Deployment Manager is used on the admin LAN For details refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE For servers which already have server switchover configured when configuring or changing HBA address rename t
322. ws Server R 2008 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise Windows iii Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows R 7 Professional Windows R 7 Ultimate Windows Vista R Business Windows Vista R Enterprise Windows Vista R Ultimate Microsoft R Windows R XP Professional operating system Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter m Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard x86 Wind 2 86 Edit Midi sees Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise x86 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard x64 Wind 2 4 Edit indows 2009 x6 HEN Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise x64 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Wi
323. x Then change the User ID and Password of Remote Server Management For SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller XSCF settings 1 Change settings on the remote management controller XSCF If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority platadm privileges 2 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 3 Select the Modify remote server management login account checkbox Then change the User ID and Password of Remote Server Management XSCF 9 1 6 Changing Port Numbers This section explains how to change port numbers When changing port numbers of the agent the nfagent port of the manager must also be changed Change this according to information in 8 2 Changing Port Numbers For details on port numbers refer to Appendix A Port List in the Design Guide VE Use the following procedure to change the port numbers for managed servers 1 Change the port numbers Windows Hyper V Use a text editor such as Notepad to change the following line in the Windows system foldeNsystem32MdriversVetc services file service name port number protocol name nfagent 23458 tcp Linux VMware Xen KVM Use a command such as vi to change the following line in
324. y End time Rate Select the graph output interval to export from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Finest sampling Hourly Daily Monthly Annual 151 3 Click Graph Output After switching to the graph display window the selected power consumption data can be displayed in line graphs Figure 19 3 Graph Display Window Update button Environmental Data Graph Data Type Power Output Time Span From 2009 11 16 1300 To 2009 11 16 1359 Rate Finest sampling Tarcet Resources Environmental Data 7 9 900 E bx900 2 7 9 bx900 3 C 0 900 4 7 amp x900 6 7 0 70x900 7 7 2 5 900 8 Plot Notation OMiew OHide EY AT Moa BY h I vi AG nAg NAG NAG MAG NAG NAG 46 NAG n 1240 12345 1220 Xs 1230 1226 1240 124 13250 The following operations can be performed from the graph display window Switching resource display By selecting and clearing the checkbox of the Target Resources it is possible to display or hide the corresponding graph Switching plot symbol display Selecting the View or Hide radio button of Plot Notation switches between displaying and hiding plot symbols in line graphs Data update Clicking the update button on the upper right of the screen updates the displayed graph Return to resource selection window Clicking Resource Selection displays the Environmental Data Graph dialog Note 0600606000
325. y the HBA address rename setup service or to enable admin LAN redundancy on the registered server Enter a MAC address in either one of the following two formats hyphen delimited xx xx xx xx xx xx or colon delimited XX XX XX XX XX XX This field can be omitted in the following cases When not using the HBA address rename setup service When not using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the managed server For a spare server whose primary servers are not using admin LAN redundancy Admin LAN Redundancy OS MAC address NIC2 Enter the MAC address of the second admin LAN network interface This network interface will be used to enable admin LAN redundancy on the registered server Enter a MAC address in either one of the following two formats hyphen delimited xx xx xx xx xx xx or colon delimited XX XX XX XX XX XX This field can be omitted in the following cases When not using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the managed server For a spare server whose primary servers are not using admin LAN redundancy Type This option is displayed if the target server runs a physical OS or VM host Select the appropriate server OS category Physical OS or VM host Selecting VM Host activates the user ID and password input fields Those refer to the user name and password entered during installation of this VM host Select the server OS category depending on whether the relevant server is used on a physical OS or a VM ho
326. yGroup The AffinityGroup for the CA connected to the port z is displayed Automatic Network Configuration The following information is displayed when the VM host is a target of network auto configuration and only when automatic network configuration has been performed Network resource name The network resource name for which automatic network configuration is performed is displayed VLAN ID The VLAN ID configured for the network resource is displayed Subnet Address The subnet address configured for the network resource is displayed When it is not configured is displayed Subnet Mask The subnet mask configured for the network resource is displayed When it is not configured is displayed A 6 4 Network Device Attributes General Area Network device name The name used to identify a network device is displayed System Name sysName The name of the device specified as a network device is displayed IP address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Device name Product name The product name of the network device is displayed For NS appliances NSAppliance is displayed Model The model name of a network device is displayed For NS appliances NSAppliance is displayed Vendor The vendor name of a network device is displayed For NS appliances Fujitsu is displayed Serial number The serial number of a network device is displayed For NS appliances is displayed Firmware version The firmware ver
327. ystem Board Unit for domain creation and display composed of physical components 218 XSCF eXtended System Control Facility The name of the Remote Management Controller for SPARC Enterprise M series servers zoning A function that provides security for Fibre Channels by grouping the Fibre Channel ports of a Fibre Channel switch into zones and only allowing access to ports inside the same zone 219
328. zation software itself VM maintenance mode One of the settings of server virtualization software that enables maintenance of VM hosts Forexample when using high availability functions such as VMware HA of server virtualization software by setting VM maintenance mode it is possible to prevent the moving of VM guests on VM hosts undergoing maintenance For details refer to the manuals of the server virtualization software being used VM management software Software for managing multiple VM hosts and the VM guests that operate on them Provides value adding functions such as movement between the servers of VM guests migration VMware Virtualization software from VMware Inc Provides a virtualized infrastructure on PC servers enabling flexible management of operations Web browser A software application that is used to view Web pages WWN World Wide Name A 64 bit address allocated to an HBA Refers to a WWNN or a WWPN WWNN World Wide Node Name The WWN set for a node The Resource Orchestrator HBA address rename sets the same WWNN for the fibre channel port of the HBA WWPN World Wide Port Name The WWN set for a port The Resource Orchestrator HBA address rename sets a WWPN for each fibre channel port of the HBA WWPN zoning The division of ports into zones based on their WWPN and setting of access restrictions between different zones Xen A type of server virtualization software XSB eXtended S

Fujitsu V3.1.0 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents